JP2023093000A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a highly amusing unprecedented game machine.SOLUTION: A game machine includes second special game state control means capable of generating a second special game state after completion of a first special game state in satisfaction of a second special condition for generating the second special game state during occurrence of the first special game state. Special performance control means is configured so as to be capable of continuously executing a first special performance corresponding to the first special game state in the second special game state in generation of the second special game state by the second special game state control means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 46

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Conventionally, as a gaming machine, a plurality of reels are provided, a game is executed by variably displaying the plurality of reels based on the player's start operation, the plurality of reels are stopped based on the player's stop operation, and the plurality of reels are stopped. A slot machine is known in which a specific game state is generated according to the stop display mode of the reels. Further, in recent years, slot machines are increasingly equipped with a display device in addition to the reels, and the display device performs game-related effects.
Further, in recent slot machines, when a specific gaming state occurs, the order of stopping the reels for establishing a winning combination is notified by lighting an LED or the like, and the player can play the reels in the indicated order of stopping. An increasing number of machines are designed to stop the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination when stopped (Patent Document 1).

2015-128566 publication

However, conventional game machines have room for improvement.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the gaming machine of the present invention executes a game accompanied by a variable display on a variable display means based on an operation by a player, and provides a special game state advantageous to the player based on establishment of a special condition. is generated as the special game state based on the establishment of the first special condition, and the second special game state is generated as the special game state based on the establishment of the second special condition. and a first special effect that enables the player to recognize that the first special game state is occurring based on the occurrence of the first special game state. and a special effect control means capable of executing a second special effect that enables a player to recognize that the second special game state is occurring based on the occurrence of the second special game state. The special game state control means, when the second special condition is established in relation to the occurrence of the first special game state, activates the second special game state after the end of the first special game state. It has a second special game state control means that can be generated, and the special effect control means, when the second special game state is generated by the second special game state control means, the second special game The configuration is such that the first special performance can be continuously executed in the state.

1 is a schematic front view showing the appearance of a gaming machine in the gaming machine of the first embodiment; FIG. It is a block diagram showing the control configuration of the gaming machine in the gaming machine of the first embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of the game state in the gaming machine of 1st Embodiment. 4 is a diagram showing a lottery table used when determining the number of ceiling games in the main controller in the gaming machine of the first embodiment; It is a diagram for explaining the transition of the game state during the AT state in the gaming machine of the first embodiment. It is a chart for explaining the additional lottery during the AT state in the gaming machine of the first embodiment. It is a chart for demonstrating the additional lottery in AT state in the modification 1 of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect image on the main display when an additional lottery is performed in the AT state in Modification 1 of the first embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect image on the main display when an additional lottery is performed in the AT state in Modification 1 of the first embodiment; FIG. 10 is a chart for explaining the execution probability of push order navigation when winning the push order bell combination in the AT state in Modification 2 of the first embodiment; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of the game state in AT state in the modified example 3 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of the game state in AT state in the modification 4 of 1st Embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining the transition of the game state in the CZ state in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining CZ state transition lottery processing in the main controller in the gaming machine of the second embodiment; FIG. It is a timing chart for explaining the transition of the probability state with respect to the transition of the CZ state in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. It is a chart for explaining the promotion probability to the CZ high probability state and the demotion probability to the CZ low probability state in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a chart for explaining the winning probability of the CZ state and the winning probability of the second CZ state in the gaming machine of the second embodiment; FIG. 10 is a chart for explaining the probability of adding the number of games to the number of continuous games in the second CZ high probability state in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect image on the main display when an additional lottery is performed for the number of continuous games in the second CZ high-probability state in the gaming machine of the second embodiment; It is a diagram showing an effect image on the main display during the second CZ high probability state in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. It is a diagram showing an effect image on the main display during the CZ overlap high probability state in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. It is a chart for explaining the notification control of the probability state of the CZ state in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. 14 is a timing chart for explaining the input state of the stop button, the rotating state of the reels, and the contents of the main display when the freeze game is executed in the gaming machine of the third embodiment; It is a chart for explaining the selection probability of the freeze time in the freeze game in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. It is a chart for explaining the selection probability of the notification mode during the freeze game in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. It is a diagram showing an effect image on the main display in the case of transition from the freeze game to the main game in the gaming machine of the third embodiment. It is a diagram showing an effect image on the main display in the case of transition from the freeze game to the main game in Modification 1 of the third embodiment. It is a diagram showing an effect image on the main display when the button effect is executed during the freeze game in the second modification of the third embodiment. It is a timing chart for explaining the rotation state of the reels and the effect content of the main display when the pseudo game is executed once during the freeze game in Modification 3 of the third embodiment. It is a timing chart for explaining the rotation state of the reels and the effect content of the main display when the pseudo game is executed twice during the freeze game in Modification 3 of the third embodiment. It is a chart for explaining the selection probability of the pattern of the pseudo-game when the pseudo-game is executed twice during the freeze game in the modification 3 of the third embodiment. It is a timing chart for explaining the transition of the game state when the CZ state occurs in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. It is a chart for explaining the transition lottery probability of the CZ state in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 14 is a timing chart for explaining the transition of the game state when the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment shifts to the pseudo-bonus state due to winning of a special replay combination in the CZ state; FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an effect image on the main display when a special replay combination is won during the CZ state in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an effect image on the main display when a normal replay combination is won during the CZ state in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment; FIG. 14 is a timing chart for explaining the transition of the game state when the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment shifts to a pseudo-bonus state due to winning of a rare combination in the CZ state; FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an effect image on the main display when a rare combination is won during the CZ state in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment; FIG. 13 is a chart for explaining selection lottery probabilities of a pseudo-bonus state during this sign period during the CZ state in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is a chart for explaining the control contents of the instruction performance to instruct the special symbol combination in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 20 is a chart for explaining the control contents of the fake instruction effect during the sign period in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment; FIG. It is a figure for explaining the transition of the game state in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 20 is a chart for explaining AT state transition lottery results when winning a bonus state in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a chart for explaining the AT state transition lottery result and the additional lottery result for each game during the bonus state in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a timing chart for explaining the transition of the game state and the effect contents of the main display when the AT state transition lottery is won during the bonus state in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an effect image on the main display when the bonus state ends or continues in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an effect image on the main display when the AT state ends or continues in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment; FIG. 13 is a timing chart for explaining the transition of the game state and the contents of the main display when the bonus combination is won during the AT state in which the effect corresponding to the bonus state is being executed in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment; FIG. . FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an effect image on the main display when a bonus combination is won during the AT state in which an effect corresponding to the AT state is being executed in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an effect image on the main display when a bonus combination is won during the AT state in which an effect corresponding to the AT state is being executed in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment;

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
Here, a slot machine as a suitable example of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described.

<First embodiment>
A first embodiment of a game machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG.

First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG.
The slot machine 1 is installed in a game arcade or the like.
As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the slot machine 1 includes a front door 1a, a bet button 2a, a return button 2c, a production button 2d, an upper production button 2f, a medal slot 2, a start lever 3, reels 4, and a stop button. 5, display window 6, medal payout device 7, medal payout port 7b, main display 8, sub-display 17, speaker 9, front panel 19, lamp 11, navigation lamp 12, advantageous section lamp 13, probability setting device 14, A display decorative frame 15 , a drum unit 4 d , an external output terminal 18 , a main controller 10 and a sub controller 20 are provided.

The main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20 are each provided with a storage section and a control section, and are devices capable of performing various kinds of arithmetic processing and various controls, and are included in the concept of a computer. Each storage unit includes a storage device such as a semiconductor memory device for storing programs, information, etc. necessary for the operation of the slot machine 1 . Each control unit includes a CPU and the like. Each control unit implements various functions of the first embodiment by appropriately reading and executing various programs and the like stored in each storage unit.

[Schematic front view showing appearance of gaming machine]
As shown in FIG. 1, a front door 1a is provided on the front surface of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG.
The front door 1a is pivoted so as to be openable and closable on one side (left side in front view) of a main body (not shown) that is arranged on the rear side of the front door 1a and attached to an island facility (not shown). It is configured so that it can be opened and closed from the side. In the following description, left and right directions are shown when the slot machine 1 is viewed from the front side.

When the slot machine 1 is viewed from the front side, a main display 8 is arranged at the center position in the left-right direction above the front door 1a. The main display 8 is composed of a liquid crystal display or the like capable of displaying a plurality of information such as information relating to effects (effect images) as will be described later, and constitutes display means.
A display decorative frame 15 having an opening in the center is disposed above the front door 1a and in front of the main display 8. The main display 8 extends from the opening of the display decorative frame 15 to the display surface. is placed facing forward.

A speaker 9 is arranged on each of the left and right sides of the main display 8, and can output sound effects corresponding to the presentation displayed on the main display 8, for example.
In addition, lamps 11 made of LEDs or the like are arranged on the left and right sides of the main display 8, respectively. can be output.

On the right side of the main display 8, an upper effect button 2f is provided as an example of operation means (effect operation means).
The upper effect button 2f is a push-type button that moves in the front-rear direction, and the pressing operation of the upper effect button 2f is detected by a non-contact type sensor or the like, and is sent to the sub control device 20 as operation information of the upper effect button 2f. output to Further, inside the upper effect button 2f, a light emitting source (not shown) made up of an LED or the like is provided, and the fact that the operation of the upper effect button 2f is effective can be notified by light emission of the light emitting source.

At the center of the front door 1a of the slot machine 1 in the vertical direction, a flat front panel 19 having decorations and various functional displays on its surface is provided.
Behind the front panel 19, a drum unit 4d having a reel 4 as variable display means is arranged.
A display window 6 made of a translucent member is formed substantially in the center of the front panel 19 so that the patterns on the reel 4 can be viewed from the front.

The reel 4 is composed of a left reel 4a, a middle reel 4b, and a right reel 4c arranged side by side in the left-right direction. is set. The reels 4 (4a to 4c) have continuous patterns (identification information) on the peripheral surface, and these patterns are configured to be identifiable from the outside through the display window 6, and the reels 4 rotate in one direction. As a result, within the display window 6, for example, the pattern can be variably displayed from top to bottom. A plurality of symbols (for example, 20 symbols) are displayed on each of the reels 4a to 4c. be.
The form of the reel 4 is not limited to this, and for example, the number of patterns on the peripheral surface may be other than 20.

Above the display window 6 on the front panel 19, navigation lamps 12a, 12b, 12c capable of informing the stop order of the stop button 5, which will be described later, are arranged corresponding to the respective reels 4a, 4b, 4c.
Further, on the lower left side of the display window 6 on the front panel 19, an advantageous section lamp 13 composed of, for example, an LED is arranged. The advantageous section lamp 13 is controlled to light up during an advantageous section (to be described later). In addition, instead of the advantageous section lamp 13, the slot machine 1 has, for example, a 7-segment display (also referred to as "7-segment") that constitutes a payout number display section for displaying the payout number of medals. , may be controlled to light up.

A sub-display 17 is arranged on the right side of the display window 6 (reel 4) on the front panel 19 .
The sub-display 17 is composed of a liquid crystal display or the like capable of displaying a plurality of information such as information relating to effects (effect images) as will be described later, and constitutes display means.
Also, the sub-display 17 has a smaller display area than the main display 8, but is arranged at a position closer to the reel 4 than the main display 8, so that the rotation and stop state of the reel 4 can be seen. However, it is easy to visually recognize the displayed image.
In addition, the sub-display device 17 is configured by a touch panel type display device, and enables various operations related to the contents of the performance by the player's touch operation on the screen. It is possible to perform a switching operation to an explanation image of the game content.

Below the front panel 19, a stepped portion protruding forward is formed, and on the upper surface of the stepped portion, a medal insertion slot 2, a bet button 2a exemplified as operation means, and an effect button 2d exemplified as operation means (effect operation means) are provided. are arranged.
The medal slot 2 is a portion into which a player inserts medals (game media). Inside the medal insertion slot 2, a medal selector 2b (medal detection means), which is a sensor or the like for detecting medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 2, is provided.
The bet button 2a is a push-type button that allows the player to input the number of bets, which is a condition for starting the game.

The effect button 2d is a push-type button that moves in the vertical direction, and the pressing operation of the effect button 2d is detected by a non-contact sensor or the like, and is output to the sub-controller 20 as operation information of the effect button 2d. be. In addition, a light source (not shown) made up of an LED or the like is provided inside the effect button 2d, and it is possible to inform that the operation of the corresponding effect button 2d is effective by light emission of the light source. The effect button 2d is arranged at a position closer to the reel 4 than the upper effect button 2f.

A start lever 3, a return button 2c, and a stop button 5 exemplified as operation means (stop operation means) are arranged on the front surface of the stepped portion.
The start lever 3 is a lever operated by the player to start the game. After inputting the number of bets, the start lever 3 becomes effective and the game can be started.
The return button 2c is a push-type button that moves in the front-rear direction, and is a button that is operated to cancel the set number of bets or to pay out medals stored as credit medals.
The stop button 5 is a button for stopping the rotating reel 4, and is composed of a push-type button that moves in the front-rear direction. , a middle stop button 5b and a right stop button 5c are arranged laterally at predetermined intervals.
In addition, each stop button 5 is provided with a light emitting source (not shown) consisting of an LED or the like, and by changing the light emitting color (from red to blue), it is possible to notify that the operation of each stop button 5 is effective. ing.

Below the front door 1a of the slot machine 1, a medal payout port 7b through which medals paid out from the medal payout device 7 are discharged is arranged.

[Block diagram showing control configuration of game machine]
FIG. 2 shows a block diagram of a control system in the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 2, the slot machine 1 includes a main controller 10 that controls the lottery of wins and progress of the game, and a main controller 10 configured to communicate with the main controller 10 based on control information from the main controller 10 . A sub-control device 20 that performs various effects control and the like is provided. Transmission of control information between the main controller 10 and the sub-controller 20 is restricted to one direction only from the main controller 10 to the sub-controller 20, and an illegal signal from the sub-controller 20 to the main controller 10 is prohibited. input is prevented.

The main controller 10 includes a bet button 2a, a medal selector 2b, a return button 2c, a start lever 3, a stop button 5, a probability setting device 14 (setting means), an external output terminal 18, a medal payout device 7, a drum unit 4d, and an advantageous section. It is connected to the lamp 13 by a communication cable, and each device can be controlled. Further, the main controller 10 is provided with a storage section (storage means) and a control section.

A probability setting device 14 as a setting means changes the winning probability of a special game state (for example, a pseudo-bonus state) in a plurality of stages (for example, 6 stages), thereby changing the setting of the degree of advantage for the player in a plurality of stages. The main control device 10 sets the winning probability of the special game state to one of a plurality of probability values with different probability based on the probability setting operation in the probability setting device 14. I do.
As for the setting values set by the probability setting device 14, setting 1 is the lowest probability value, setting 6 is the highest probability value, and the larger the number, the higher the probability value. Therefore, setting 1 is the most unfavorable setting for the player (setting with the lowest degree of advantage), the larger the number, the more advantageous the player is, and setting 6 is the most favorable setting for the player (the setting with the highest degree of advantage). It has become.

Incidentally, the winning probability in the special game state may be controlled by a fixed probability value without being affected by the setting value of the probability setting device 14. - 特許庁
Also, by changing the transition probability to the CZ state or the AT state according to the set value in the probability setting device 14, the degree of advantage of the player may be changed in a plurality of stages.
In addition to the special game state, the probability of winning a predetermined minor combination (eg, bell combination) may be changed in a plurality of stages (eg, 6 stages).

The external output terminal 18 outputs information related to the game played in the slot machine 1 to a management device (not shown) or a calling device (not shown) installed in the game arcade. The number of medals inserted, the number of medals paid out, the number of occurrences of game states advantageous to the player (for example, a pseudo-bonus state and an AT state, which will be described later), and the transition period, etc. is output by the control of

The drum unit 4d is a device that integrally includes reels 4a to 4c and a stepping motor (not shown) that rotates each of the reels 4a to 4c.
The medal payout device 7 has a medal storage section (not shown) that collects the medals inserted into the medal selector 2b as medals before payout, and pays out the medals stored in the medal storage section to the medal payout opening 7b. is. The medal payout device 7 is provided with a sensor for detecting the paid out medals.
The medal selector 2b is provided on the downstream side of the medal slot 2 and has a sensor for detecting medals inserted from the medal slot 2. FIG.

The storage unit of the main controller 10 stores various information such as a game program relating to the game, a table for performing a lottery for a small winning combination and an AT state, and the like.
The main control device 10 operates by means of a control section and a storage section storing programs, thereby performing processes related to the progress of the game of the slot machine 1, and the like.

Based on the signal from the start lever 3, the main controller 10 performs processing such as starting the game and sampling random numbers from a random number generator (not shown). Then, lottery processing for a winning combination is performed based on the sampled random numbers. Further, according to the control program of the storage unit, for example, by updating the random number at a predetermined timing, random number generation processing is performed, based on the generated random number, transition lottery processing in pseudo bonus state, transition lottery processing in AT state, Add-on lottery processing and the like during the AT state are performed.

That is, the main controller 10 is provided with lottery means for lottery (determining) whether or not to give a privilege such as a small win, a pseudo-bonus state, an AT state, etc., corresponding to the execution of the game.
In addition, the lottery pattern using random numbers may be any pattern other than the pattern described above, and the lottery for the role is performed based on the random numbers generated by software, and the pseudo-bonus state or AT state transition is performed based on the random numbers generated by the random number generator. A lottery, an additional lottery, or the like may be performed, or all lotteries may be performed using random numbers generated by software or random numbers generated by a random number generator.

Main controller 10 also controls the rotation of reel 4 based on a signal from start lever 3 . The main controller 10 detects the rotational positions of the reels 4a, 4b, and 4c based on signals from sensors (not shown) provided on the reels 4a, 4b, and 4c. It is possible to grasp the rotational position of the pattern on 4c. Then, based on the signal from the stop button 5, control is performed to stop the desired pattern within the display window 6. FIG.

In addition, the main control device 10, in accordance with the operation of the operation unit such as the start lever 3, performs game progress processing including internal lottery processing, etc., manages various information stored in the storage unit, and controls devices such as the medal payout device 7. The game of the slot machine 1 is realized by controlling the .

The sub-control device 20 is connected to the production button 2d, the upper production button 2f, the speaker 9, the main display 8, the lamp 11, the navigation lamp 12, and the sub-display 17 by communication cables and can communicate with them. The sub control device 20 controls these devices according to control information from the main control device 10 . Further, the sub control device 20 is provided with a storage section and a control section.

The storage unit of the sub-controller 20 stores various kinds of information such as programs related to effects, effect image data, sound data, and the like.
The sub-controller 20 operates by means of a control unit and a storage unit in which programs are stored, and performs processes such as effects synchronized with the game of the slot machine 1 according to commands (control information) from the main control unit 10 . For example, the main display 8, the lamp 11, the speaker 9, and the like are controlled to output an effect image indicating the transition of the game state, output sound effects, and produce a lamp effect.

Also, the sub control device 20 can control the switching timing of each effect based on signals from the effect button 2d, the upper effect button 2f, and the touch panel of the sub display 17.
Either or both of the main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20, in the present invention, special game state control means, special game state switching control means, change lottery control means, privilege provision means, notification control means, game Control means, extended lottery control means, probability control means, duplicate notification control means, state notification control means, lottery means, game control means, freeze game control means, specific notification control means, special game state occurrence determination means, first game control Means, second game control means, special game state right granting means, game result derivation means, specific game state control means, effect control means, privilege lottery means, notification change control means, special effect control means, second special game state control Means, post-end instruction effect control means, midway instruction effect control means, and privilege provision effect control means are configured.

Such a slot machine 1 is configured to be able to execute slot machine games as described below under the control of the main controller 10 .

At the start of the game, the player inserts medals from the medal slot 2 or sets the number of bets from credit medals by operating the bet button 2a.
Then, when the number of bets reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3), one of the conditions for starting the game is met, and a state is entered in which the player has the right to execute one game and can start the game.

In this game-startable state, the operation of the start lever 3 is enabled. In this effective state, when the start lever 3 is tilted, all the conditions for starting the game are satisfied, the game is started, and the reels 4a to 4c on which a plurality of symbols are displayed start to fluctuate. An internal lottery process that predetermines the lottery result of this game for multiple roles (including loss) such as replay roles, minor roles, and bonus roles, pseudo-bonus state, and AT state transition before reel 4 stops is executed. be done.
In the internal lottery process, a winning combination for the current game is determined by lottery based on a predetermined winning probability from among a plurality of winning combinations. For example, lottery results such as a replay combination and a bell combination are derived by lottery.

In addition, when the main controller 10 receives a signal from the start lever 3, the predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has not passed since the reels 4 started rotating in the previous game. , by temporarily waiting (inserting a waiting time) for the start of rotation of the reels 4 to delay the start of rotation of the reels 4, the number of times the game is executed per unit time (for example, one minute) is increased to a predetermined number ( For example, limit control is performed to limit the number of games to within 14 times. That is, main controller 10 has a game number limiting means capable of limiting the number of times games are executed per unit time within a predetermined number. By this control, the shortest execution time required for one game is defined as a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds).
It should be noted that the period for monitoring the shortest execution time may be set other than based on the start of rotation of the reel 4 between games. Any point in time may be used as a reference as long as the number of games can be monitored.

Each of the reels 4a to 4c is an example of display means, and a plurality of patterns (replay, bell, watermelon, cherry, BAR, 7) are displayed in a predetermined arrangement on the peripheral surface of each reel 4a to 4c. , and after the rotation speed is gradually increased from a stopped state, it reaches steady rotation at a constant speed.
When such steady rotation is reached, the stop buttons 5a to 5c provided corresponding to the respective reels 4a to 4c can be pressed.

When the stop buttons 5a to 5c are pressed in this state, the reels 4a to 4c are controlled to stop so that they are stopped at combinations of symbols allowed by the operation timing and the lottery result of the internal lottery process. .
In the stop control (pull-in stop control) of each reel 4a to 4c, a pull-in range is set for each, and a predetermined number (for example, 4 (1) symbols can be pulled in, and only one of the symbols in the pull-in range can be stopped on the effective line.

In the stopped state, the reels 4a to 4c are stopped (stopped display) so that the three vertically continuous patterns displayed on the respective reels 4a to 4c face the outside of the machine through the display window 6, and a prize is awarded based on the stopped display mode at this time. Presence or absence is determined.
Winning is determined based on the combination of symbols stopped on the middle winning line connecting the middle symbols of each reel 4 in the display window 6 . Therefore, for example, even if predetermined symbols are aligned on an oblique line, winning is determined by a combination of unaligned symbols that are actually stopped in the middle stage at that time.

Winning of a winning combination such as a small combination or a replay combination is determined based on such a combination of symbols on the winning line.
The small roles include, for example, a bell role, a watermelon role, and a cherry role.

For the bell combination, two bell combinations with different combinations of corresponding symbols are provided. For example, a common bell combination in which the corresponding symbol combinations are respectively ``Bell, Replay, and Bell'' in the order of ``left reel 4a, middle reel 4b, and right reel 4c'' on the winning line (the same applies hereinafter), and `` A push-order bell role of "bell, bell, bell" can be provided.

The common bell combination is a small combination in which the combination of corresponding symbols ("bell replay bell") stops regardless of the operation order (referred to as the pressing order) of the stop buttons 5a to 5c. It is a small combination in which the corresponding combination of symbols ("bell-bell-bell") is stopped by following the pressing order.

Furthermore, for the bell role, one of six pressing orders (for example, "5a→5b→5c", "5c→5b→5a", etc.) can There are provided six push order bell combinations 1 to 6 in which the corresponding combination of symbols ("Bell, Bell, Bell") is stop-displayed when the stop buttons 5a to 5c are operated. Such push order bell combinations 1 to 6, when the stop buttons 5a to 5c are operated in accordance with the other five push orders (push order other than the specific push order), the corresponding symbol combinations ("Bell, Bell-Bell") is not stopped and displayed, and a combination of other symbols such as "Bell-Bell Replay" (referred to as "Bell-dropped eyes") is stopped and displayed.

Incidentally, when winning the push-order bell combination, regardless of whether the stop button 5 is operated second or third, if only the stop button 5 operated first follows a specific push order, it corresponds to the push-order bell combination. The stop control of the reels 4 may be performed so as to stop the combination of symbols. Further, the number of pushing order bells is not limited to six, and three pushing order bells 1 to 3 may be provided.

The watermelon role is a small role (rare role) in which the combination of corresponding symbols is "watermelon, watermelon, watermelon". Watermelon, watermelon, watermelon" has a strong watermelon role in which it stops on a line rising to the right or a line falling to the right.
The cherry combination is a small combination (rare combination) in which the combination of corresponding symbols is "cherry, ANY, ANY". There is a strong cherry combination in which the is stopped at the middle stage of the left reel 4a.

In the replay role, two replay roles with different combinations of corresponding symbols are provided. A normal replay role (hereinafter referred to as a replay role) in which the corresponding combination of symbols is "replay, replay, replay"; A chance replay role (chance role) called "replay bell bell" is provided.
"Replay Bell Bell" (chance eye) is a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed when the chance replay role is won, and is a so-called rare role that has a relatively low winning probability in the internal lottery process, along with the watermelon role and cherry role. Of these, the weak watermelon role and weak cherry role are set as weak rare roles, and the roles other than the weak watermelon role and weak cherry role are set as strong rare roles.

In addition, the main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20 can generate AT (assist time) as a game state related to the push-order bell combination. AT is a state in which, when the bell combination of the pressing order is won, the pressing order of the winning bell combination is announced by the main display 8 and the navigation lamp 12 (the navigation of the pressing order is executed).
That is, the sub control device 20 constitutes notification control means capable of executing control for notifying operation information (specific operation information) for deriving a specific result ("bell-bell-bell") as a result of the game. be.
Therefore, the player can easily obtain medals by the generation of AT, which is controlled during the pseudo-bonus state and the AT state, which will be described later.
It should be noted that the navigation lamp 12 may be configured to be driven and controlled directly by the main controller 10 without going through the sub-controller 20 .

Based on the combinations of symbols as described above, winning of a small combination, a replay combination, and a bonus combination is determined (determining means), and as a result of the determination, the combination of symbols is the combination of symbols corresponding to each of the above. Sometimes, a winning is established, and a game value is given according to the establishment of each winning.
For example, when a combination of symbols corresponding to a small combination such as a bell combination, a cherry combination, and a watermelon combination is stopped, establishment of a small combination winning is determined, and the medal payout device 7 is driven and controlled to open the medal payout port 7b. A predetermined number of medals are paid out through the game.

Specifically, in the bell combination (common bell combination, push-order bell combination), when the combination of the corresponding symbols is stopped and displayed, eight medals are paid out.
Further, when the pressing order bell combination is won, if the stop buttons 5a to 5c are operated in a pressing order other than the specific pressing order (five pressing orders), no medals are paid out.
It should be noted that when the pressing order bell role is won, if the stop buttons 5a to 5c are operated in a pressing order other than the specific pressing order (five pressing orders), the number of medals less than eight (for example, one) may be paid out, and in some push orders other than the specific push order, less than 8 medals (for example, 1 medal) may be paid out, and in other push orders, no medals may be paid out. can be
Also, the winning probability of the bell combination is set so that the number of medals held by the player increases during the AT state, which will be described later.

Further, when the combinations of symbols corresponding to the weak watermelon combination and the strong watermelon combination are stopped and displayed, two medals are paid out.
Also, when the combinations of symbols corresponding to the weak cherry combination and the strong cherry combination are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out.
It should be noted that the number of medals to be paid out when the combination of symbols corresponding to each winning combination is stopped and displayed may be other than the number described above.

Further, the replay combination and the chance replay combination are determined by the stop display of the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay combination and the chance replay combination, and the previous game is performed without inserting medals in the next game (without setting the number of bets). The game can be played with the same number of bets as the number of bets set in .

In addition, the winning probabilities of each small combination and replay combination are based on the relationship of the Bell combination > Replay combination > Weak cherry combination > Weak watermelon combination > Chance replay combination > Strong Cherry combination > Strong Watermelon combination, that is, Bell It is assumed that the combination is set to be the most likely to be won and the strong watermelon combination is the least likely to be won.
It should be noted that the relationship of winning probabilities of each combination may be other than those described above.

[Transition of game state in game machine]
Next, the game state transition in the slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
The slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment can execute a 3-bet game in which the game is executed by spending 3 medals (3-bet). It shows a game state transition mode when a 3-bet game is executed.
In the first embodiment, the game state transition control is performed only when the 3-bet game is executed, and control is performed so as not to change the game state in other games (for example, the 2-bet game). However, the execution of the game itself may be permitted only when 3 bets are made, and the execution of the game may be prohibited when the number of bets is other than that.
Hereinafter, the 3-bet game will be referred to as a "game".

As shown in FIG. 3, the game of the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment is executed in a plurality of game states including a normal game state, a CZ state, a pseudo-bonus state, and an AT state. The main controller 10 can be controlled to shift from one game state to another game state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition.

In addition, the main controller 10 of the first embodiment is provided with section control means capable of controlling the game section to be either a normal section or an advantageous section in addition to the above-described game state.
The normal section is a game section in which push order navigation is not executed, starts when the next game starts after the end of the advantageous section, and ends when the advantageous section transition condition is satisfied. .
In the normal section, the advantageous section lamp 13 is controlled to be extinguished.

In addition, in the normal section, it is decided to shift to the advantageous section by satisfying the advantageous section transition condition, for example, by winning a predetermined winning combination (for example, a bell winning combination) in an internal lottery.
Note that the conditions for shifting to the AT state may be established based on the winning of a predetermined rare combination in the normal section, and in this case, it is preferable to shift to the AT state after the conditions for shifting to the advantageous section are established. Therefore, since the pushing order navigation is executed after the favorable section transition condition is satisfied, the pushing order navigation is not executed in the normal section.
Also, when main controller 10 is reset, control is performed in the normal section.

The advantageous section is a game section in which the push order navigation may be executed, and is a game section that is more advantageous to the player than the normal section because the push order navigation can be executed.
Also, the advantageous interval starts when the next game starts after the advantageous interval transition condition is established in the normal interval, and ends when a predetermined advantageous interval end condition is established.
In the advantageous section, the advantageous section lamp 13 is controlled to be lit.
After the transition to the advantageous section, the lighting state of the advantageous section lamp 13 is started at a game state (for example, a pseudo-bonus state) in which the number of medals held by the player increases due to the execution of push-order navigation. may

In addition, the advantageous section shifts to the normal section when the condition for ending the advantageous section is established based on the end of a predetermined game state among the plurality of game states described above.
Examples of conditions for ending the advantageous interval include the end of a pseudo-bonus state that does not transition to the AT state, the end of the AT state, and the like.
It should be noted that the condition for ending the advantageous section may not be established at a part of the end of the pseudo-bonus state that does not shift to the AT state.

Furthermore, in addition to the above, if the number of games in one advantageous interval (the number of games in the advantageous interval) reaches the upper limit number of games (for example, 3000 games), the player in one advantageous interval It is also set when the number of net increase in medals (difference number), which indicates the increase in the number of medals held by the player, exceeds the upper limit (for example, 2400), and the game state shifts to the normal game state at the end of the advantageous section. It is a thing. The advantageous section ends when at least one of the three end conditions is satisfied.

In particular, reaching the upper limit number of games (upper limit number) in the above-described advantageous section and reaching the upper limit number of net increase in the number of medals in the advantageous section are restricted functions to limit the amount of medals acquired by the player. It is provided as a so-called limiter, and it is possible to suppress gambling.
Note that the main controller 10 counts the number of games up to the upper limit number of games only for normal games, and although the details will be described later, the number of games executed separately from the normal game is counted as the number of games. I try not to count.

That is, the main controller 10 is provided with counting means that counts the number of times the normal game (the number of games in the advantageous period) is executed in the advantageous period and does not count the number of times the pseudo game is executed.
In addition, the main controller 10 as section control means shifts the game section to the normal section when the counting result by the counting means indicates the upper limit number of games (specified number of times) in the advantageous section.

In addition, in the first embodiment, for example, the activation of the limit function is determined in advance during the AT state, and the period from the determination to the activation of the limiter is set as the ending period, which is advantageous to the player. A performance (running performance) is executed to celebrate in advance that the state has continued to the upper limit.
Further, in the first embodiment, although the details will be described later, the pseudo-game cannot be executed during the ending period, so that the player does not have unnecessary expectations.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, based on the execution of the game, transition control between the normal section, which is the section in which the push order navigation cannot be performed, and the advantageous section, which is the section in which the push order navigation can be performed, is performed. I have to. In the initial state of the slot machine 1, the normal section is controlled, and when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (for example, winning the bell combination) during execution of the game in the normal section, the transition to the advantageous section is performed. will be

(Normal game state)
The normal game state is a game state in which the main controller 10 of the slot machine 1 stays when it is reset, and is a disadvantageous state for the player.
As shown in FIG. 3, the main controller 10 performs lottery processing for shifting to the CZ state, the pseudo-bonus state, and the AT state while staying in the normal game state. Depending on the specification of the slot machine 1 or the like, the normal game state may not be directly shifted to the AT state.
In a normal game state such as when the main controller 10 of the slot machine 1 is reset, the game section is controlled to be the normal section, and when the advantageous section shift condition is established during the normal game state, the game section is changed to the normal section. Transition from section to advantageous section.

In addition, the normal game state has a normal probability state and a high probability state, and in each game, the probability of transition to the pseudo-bonus state is controlled to be higher in the high probability state than in the normal probability state. It is a thing.

The probability state transition is controlled such that, for example, the normal probability state transitions to the high probability state with a probability of 30% when winning the weak watermelon or weak cherry combination. On the other hand, as a predetermined fall condition, for example, control is performed to shift from the high probability state to the normal probability state with a probability of 5% when the replay hand is won, when the bell hand is won, and when the hand is lost.

The probability of winning in the pseudo-bonus state is set at, for example, a probability of 20% when winning a chance hand or a strong cherry hand in the normal probability state, and is set to 20% when winning a chance hand or strong cherry hand in the high probability state. It is set with a probability of 50%.
When the probability state changes from the normal probability state to the high probability state, the sub-control device 20 controls the main display 8 to notify that the probability state is the high probability state. When a stage that advances through grasslands is displayed, the background of the stage is changed from the daytime background to the evening background to notify the high probability state.

However, instead of ensuring that the stage is changed when a high probability state occurs, a stage change lottery is performed with a predetermined probability (for example, 30%) in the game during the high probability state, and this change lottery is won. Control is performed such that the stage is changed only when
In addition, even in the game during the normal probability state, a change lottery to the stage is performed with a predetermined probability (2%), and even if this change lottery is won, control is performed to change to the stage showing the high probability state. .

On the other hand, when staying in the stage consisting of the evening background, a lottery to change to the daytime background is also performed, and in the game during the normal probability state, the change lottery is won with a relatively high probability (for example, 20%), and the probability is high. In the game during the state, control is performed so that the change lottery is won with a relatively low probability (for example, 5%).
Therefore, even if the stage consists of the evening background, it does not necessarily mean that the player stays in the high probability state, and the stage consisting of the evening background only suggests the high probability state.

In addition, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is changed, or when the main controller 10 is reset, after shifting to the advantageous section through the normal section, the normal game state in the normal probability state substantially A game can be started, but the normal game state may be started in a high probability state with a predetermined probability for each set value in the probability setting device 14 .
Further, during the high probability state, the winning probability of the CZ state and AT state may be increased in addition to the pseudo bonus state.

In addition, in the game during the normal game state, a pseudo-game (pseudo game) is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a game that notifies transition to a predetermined game state (for example, pseudo-bonus state) is executed.
It should be noted that, based on the pseudo-game, it is also possible to carry out the transfer lottery of the above benefits (CZ state, pseudo-bonus state, AT state).

During the normal game state, an individual effect that is completed in one game is executed on the main display 8 or the sub display 17 with a predetermined probability.
The individual effects are effects that are mainly executed to heighten the player's sense of expectation, and include winning effects that are executed based on the lottery result of the winning combination in the main controller 10.例文帳に追加
In addition, the individual effects include those that are executed based on the probability state at that time (normal probability state or high probability state) and those that are executed to explain the game.
The winning effect is a effect that is mainly executed to notify the result of the lottery for the role. Along with the appearance of , the degree of expectation for the occurrence of benefits (pseudo bonus status, etc.) is displayed, and text information such as "chance" and "extremely hot" is displayed. It is an effect in which an image is displayed according to the lottery result related to the award of the privilege triggered by the role).

・Transition processing from the normal game state to the pseudo-bonus state (arrow a1 in FIG. 3)
The number of games is counted by the execution of the game during the normal game state (advantageous section), and when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number (special number: ceiling game number), the normal game state is changed to the pseudo-bonus state. transition to
The number of ceiling games is determined when the game section shifts from the normal section to the advantageous section, and although the details will be described later, the number of ceiling games at that time is set for each transition to the advantageous section.

Further, by executing the game during the normal game state, when a predetermined combination is won, a lottery for transition to the pseudo-bonus state is performed, and even if the transition lottery is won with a predetermined probability, the state from the normal game state to the pseudo-bonus state is also performed. Migration takes place.

More specifically, main controller 10 preliminarily performs a lottery process for shifting to the pseudo-bonus state based on the winning of a predetermined rare combination as a specific lottery result. For example, the process of transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state is performed at a predetermined probability (for example, 20%) when a chance combination or a strong cherry combination is won.
The pseudo-bonus state is a gaming state that continues until a predetermined number of games are played, during which an AT state transition lottery is performed. Details of the pseudo-bonus state will be described later.

Further, in the normal game state, the probability of winning the pseudo-bonus state when a predetermined rare combination is won can be changed according to the set value in the probability setting device 14 as setting means. Occasionally, 10% at setting 1, 12% at setting 2, 14% at setting 3, 16% at setting 4, 18% at setting 5, and 20% at setting 6 will transition to a pseudo-bonus state. ing.

It should be noted that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state, that is, the decision as to whether or not to award the privilege may be made by means other than the completion of the number of ceiling games or the lottery of the rare combination by the lottery means. For example, when a predetermined winning combination (for example, a bell combination) has been won (or the actual number of times) has reached a predetermined number of times, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state may be determined, or a lottery for the pseudo-bonus state may be conducted at that time. Alternatively, predetermined points may be added according to the lottery of the role, and the points to be added may be changed according to the type of the winning role and the state of winning the role. When the predetermined number is reached, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state may be determined, or a lottery for the pseudo-bonus state may be conducted at that time.

Also, a pseudo-bonus state may be generated during the AT state, which will be described later.
In addition, in the first embodiment, the chance combination and the strong cherry combination are set as the lottery triggering combinations in the pseudo-bonus state, but the pseudo-bonus state may be selected by lottery when other combinations are won.

During a predetermined period immediately before the number of games executed reaches the ceiling number of games, and if the lottery for transition to the pseudo-bonus state is won, before the transition to the pseudo-bonus state, the player's response to the transition to the pseudo-bonus state In order to heighten the sense of anticipation, the main indicator effect (first specific effect) is executed on the main display 8 for a predetermined number of games (for example, 18 games) to notify that the game will finally shift to the pseudo-bonus state.

That is, even if the transition to the pseudo-bonus state is determined in advance, the main controller 10 does not immediately transition to the pseudo-bonus state, and generates the pseudo-bonus state after a predetermined number of games have been executed from that point. In this way, based on the fact that the main controller 10 has determined in advance that the pseudo-bonus state will occur, the sub-controller 20, during a predetermined number of game execution periods before transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state, This means that the control for executing the present omen effect is performed.
Therefore, when the transition to the pseudo-bonus state is determined in advance for granting the privilege, the sub control device 20 can execute this precursor effect over a plurality of games for a predetermined period before the granting of the privilege. be.

In addition, before reaching the ceiling game number and when the pseudo-bonus state is determined by the transition lottery, a waiting period for a predetermined number of games (for example, 12 games ) is set, and this precursor effect is executed after the end of this waiting period.
During the waiting period, for example, the execution probability of the individual effect is increased, and the player's expectation for the execution of this precursor effect is heightened.
Therefore, when shifting to the pseudo-bonus state, the transition is made after the waiting period and the execution of this portent effect.

During this omen effect, the main display 8 is switched to a stage image with a background different from that during the normal game state, and an effect on the omen stage in which the characters that appear perform different actions than during the normal game state. image is executed. For example, the production on the sign stage, such as a character advancing through a cave, is performed through a plurality of games. These effects do not change even if one game ends. For example, even if screens are switched due to the occurrence of various events in a predetermined game, the effect itself, such as a character advancing through a cave, does not change and continues in the next game. Therefore, this portent effect is a series of effects that are executed over (across) a plurality of games.
In addition, a plurality of patterns with different backgrounds and the like are prepared for the precursor stage, and under the control of the sub-controller 20, one of the patterns of the precursor stage is selected according to whether or not the pseudo-bonus state is won at that time. It is supposed to be

In addition, when the number of games executed is not immediately before reaching the ceiling number of games, and when you win a rare role (for example, a chance role) that triggers the transition to the pseudo-bonus state, you win the lottery to transition to the pseudo-bonus state. Even if it does not, in the same way as when the pseudo-bonus state is won, a predetermined number of games (for example, 18 games) to inform that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state will not finally occur (a second specific effect ) is executed on the main display 8 .

That is, the sub control device 20 performs a specific effect (second specific effect) over a plurality of games based on establishment of a predetermined condition when the main control device 10 has not previously determined the transition to the pseudo-bonus state. It is possible to execute the fake omen production as.
Therefore, regardless of whether or not the main controller 10 has determined in advance to transition to the pseudo-bonus state, the sub controller 20 is provided with a privilege when a predetermined condition such as winning a chance combination is established. It is possible to execute a specific effect (a real portent effect or a fake portent effect) that can indicate whether or not the game is to be played across a plurality of games.

It should be noted that the fake sign effect is executed with a predetermined probability (for example, 50%) when a rare role that triggers the transition to the pseudo-bonus state is won, but the lottery for transition to the pseudo-bonus state is not won. , or you may make it always be executed.
In addition, when the fake sign effect is executed at a time other than immediately before the number of game executions reaches the ceiling game number, the fake sign production is performed in correspondence with a period (zone) in which the preset number of ceiling games is likely to be selected. It is preferable to execute the effect, and in this way, when the ceiling number of games reaches a period in which it is easy to be selected, it is possible to raise the player's expectation even if the pseudo-bonus state does not occur. be.

Also, when the fake precursor effect is executed based on the winning of the rare role, the period immediately before the fake precursor effect is executed is the same as when the pseudo-bonus state is won. (for example, 12 games) are set.
The main omen effect and the fake omen effect basically consist of a series of effects over multiple games in which the effect images (stages or characters that appear, etc.) are set in the same way, and the contents to be notified in the end are different. Thus, it is possible to attract the player's sense of expectation until the end.

In addition, in the main sign effect and the fake sign effect, it is notified whether or not the transition to the pseudo-bonus state is finally made. For example, a continuous effect (continuous effect) is executed from two games before). The continuous effect is executed by, for example, a battle effect consisting of an image in which a friend character and an enemy character fight for a predetermined number of games (for example, three games).

In the continuous production (battle production), a production image in which a friend character and an enemy character compete in a predetermined battle event is executed for each game, and the production contents of each game are carried over to the next game. For example, when an ally character given in a predetermined game is in a disadvantageous situation, an effect is executed so that the situation is carried over to the next game, and an effect is produced in which one of the characters finally wins. executed.
In the continuous production (fight production), the type of friendly characters, the type of enemy characters, and the type of battle event may be changed depending on whether or not the pseudo-bonus state is entered.

In addition, depending on whether or not there is a transition to a predetermined pseudo-bonus state, the content of the fight between the ally character and the enemy character in each game is set. It is set so that there are more games in which the ally character is superior than in other cases.
That is, the continuous effect is a series of effects that are executed over (straddle) a plurality of games.
Further, in the continuous effect, a button effect may be executed in parallel.

Then, when shifting to the pseudo-bonus state (in the case of this precursor effect), an image in which the ally character finally wins is displayed as an image notifying the shift to the pseudo-bonus state, and the transition to the pseudo-bonus state does not occur. In the case of the fake precursor effect, an image of the final defeat of the teammate character is displayed as an image notifying that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state will not occur.

Instead of the continuous effect, an effect that is completed only in the final game of the main portent effect and the fake portent effect may be executed, and the transition to the pseudo-bonus state may be notified based on the result of the effect.
Further, the main portent effect and the fake portent effect may be generated without executing the waiting period. In addition, the fake portent effect may be generated without fail or at a predetermined probability when a rare combination that triggers a shift to the pseudo-bonus state is won.
Also, after winning the rare combination, only the continuous effect during the present sign effect may be executed to shift to a pseudo-bonus state or the like.
Further, the number of games of the main portent effect and the fake portent effect may be any number of games, or may be selectively determined from a plurality of numbers of games (for example, 15 to 20 games). Similarly, the waiting period may also be changed by selectively determining the number of games (for example, 10 to 15 games).

The number of games that can be selected may be set to be the same as the execution period of the real sign effect and the fake sign effect, but the number of games that is not selected in the fake sign effect may be selectable during the real sign effect. In this way, when the precursor effect is completed in a small number of games which is impossible in the fake precursor effect, or when the precursor effect continues to a large number of games which is impossible in the fake precursor effect, this precursor effect is determined. It is possible to improve the expectation of the player.

・Transition processing from normal game state to CZ state (arrow c1 in FIG. 3)
In the normal game state, the main controller 10 performs lottery processing for shifting to the CZ state based on winning of a predetermined rare combination. For example, the transition processing to the CZ state is performed with a predetermined probability (for example, 10%) when winning a strong watermelon combination. The condition for transitioning to the CZ state is winning the transition lottery.

In addition, in order to increase the player's expectation for the transition to the CZ state, even if a predetermined rare combination is won and the transition to the CZ state is decided, the transition to the CZ state is not performed immediately, and finally A continuous effect (main continuous effect) of the CZ state for a predetermined number of games (for example, 3 games) for informing the transition to the CZ state may be executed on the main display 8 .

In addition, even if a predetermined rare combination is won, but the lottery for transition to the CZ state is not won, the CZ state of a predetermined number of games (for example, 3 games) notifies that the final transition to the CZ state will not occur. may be executed on the main display 8. In this case, in the CZ state continuous production and the fake continuous production, the characters appearing are basically set in the same manner, and the contents to be finally notified are different, thereby attracting the player's expectation until the end. You may do so.

For example, as a CZ state continuous effect (or fake continuous effect), effect images may be executed in which characters challenge sports competitions throughout each game. In this case, during the continuous production (or fake continuous production), the sports competition is continuously executed through the game in between, and if the CZ state is won, the competition is finally successful (for example, scoring a goal in soccer). success) and the CZ state is not won, an effect image for failing the competition is executed.

・Transition processing from normal game state to AT state (arrow g1 in FIG. 3)
In the normal game state, the main controller 10 performs lottery processing for shifting to the AT state based on winning of a predetermined rare combination. For example, when a strong cherry combination is won, the transition processing to the AT state is performed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1%). The condition for transitioning to the AT state is winning the transition lottery.
In addition, the transition to the AT state in the normal game state is performed on the condition that a predetermined rare combination is won, and a predetermined probability ( For example, 1%) may be used.

In the first embodiment, the transition to the AT state is executed mainly via a pseudo-bonus state in order to increase the player's sense of expectation. The probability of shifting to the AT state is set to an extremely low probability.
In addition, depending on the set probability in the probability setting device 14, it may be possible to change the probability of directly shifting from the normal game state to the AT state, or only in the case of relatively high set values (for example, setting 4 to 6) It may be possible to win a lottery for transition from the normal game state directly to the AT state.
In addition, in the normal game state, when the AT state shift lottery is won, a waiting period is inserted and the precursor effect is executed in the same manner as when the above-described pseudo-bonus state occurs, and the AT state is generated after the precursor effect is completed. It is designed to

In addition, when a lottery for transition from the normal game state directly to the AT state is won, selection control of an indication performance different from that at the time of occurrence of the pseudo-bonus state may be performed. In this case, the selection rate of the precursor effect composed of characters and backgrounds which appear less frequently (or do not appear) in the fake precursor effect may be made higher than when the pseudo-bonus state occurs. Also, the precursor effect, which is not executed when the pseudo-bonus state occurs, may be executed only when the state is directly shifted to the AT state.

(CZ state)
In the CZ state, the pushing order navigation is not performed when the pushing order bell role is won, but since the lottery processing for transition to the pseudo-bonus state is performed at a higher probability in each game than in the normal game state, is also a game state in which it is easy to shift to a pseudo-bonus state.
Although the push order navigation is not performed when the push order bell role is won, the push order navigation may be executed when the push order bell role is won. Push order navigation may be executed with a predetermined probability (for example, 40%) when winning a role.

While staying in the CZ state, it is easier to shift to the pseudo-bonus state than while staying in the normal game state, so the CZ state is positioned as a chance zone in the flow of a series of games.
The number of games that can be played in the CZ state is assumed to be the minimum number of games and 10 games. will end.
During the CZ state, control information relating to the CZ state is transmitted from the main controller 10 to the sub-controller 20, and under the control of the main controller 10 and the sub-controller 20, the main display 8 is displayed during the CZ state. Various effects and the number of remaining games are displayed on the main display 8.

・Transition processing from CZ state to pseudo-bonus state (arrow e1 in FIG. 3)
In the CZ state, a pseudo-bonus state transition lottery process is performed in each game.
The winning probability of the pseudo-bonus state transition lottery process is set according to the winning combination of each game. The probability of winning in the pseudo-bonus state transition lottery process is, for example, 50% when winning a rare combination, 10% when winning a bell combination and a replay combination, and 5% when losing. The pseudo-bonus state transition lottery is performed for each game during the CZ state, but whether or not there is a transition to the pseudo-bonus state is determined in the final game of the CZ state, and when the transition to the pseudo-bonus state is notified in the final game. , the game state shifts to the pseudo-bonus state as in the normal game state.

That is, the CZ state is similar to the above-described high-probability state in that the probability of shifting to the pseudo-bonus state is higher than that in the normal game state, but in the CZ state, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state is performed in the normal game state. Since there is a possibility that a combination that is not a lottery trigger combination (Bell combination or Replay combination) may shift to the pseudo-bonus state, the state is more advantageous to the player than the high-probability state.
Since the pseudo-bonus status transition lottery is executed when each winning combination is internally won, the pseudo-bonus status transition lottery is performed even if the symbol corresponding to the winning combination does not stop on the reel 4 (at the time of failure). be done.
Further, when the CZ state ends and the state shifts to the pseudo-bonus state, the game section continues as the advantageous section.

Also, the probability of winning the pseudo-bonus state for some or all of the winning combinations may be other than the above. Further, the pseudo-bonus state transition lottery trigger during the CZ state may be other than those described above.
In addition, the lottery process for transition to the pseudo-bonus state is performed when the bell combination is won, but the lottery process for transition to the pseudo-bonus state may be performed based on the winning of the symbol corresponding to the bell combination.

During the CZ state, the main display 8 displays a CZ state image that allows the player to recognize that the player is in the CZ state through the game during the CZ state.
Further, when a game in which a lottery for transition to the pseudo-bonus state is won is executed, a predetermined preparation effect image (moving image) is displayed while the game is being executed, and after the game is completed, the state is shifted to the pseudo-bonus state. A notification image is displayed to notify that effect.
For example, during the CZ state, an image in which the main character is sleeping is displayed as the CZ state image, and during the game in which the pseudo-bonus state transition lottery is won, the main character is closed up. Then, a preparation performance moving image for directing whether or not to wake up is displayed, and a notification image for waking up the main character after the game is over is displayed, thereby executing a performance for reporting that the player has won the pseudo-bonus state.

Also, the preparation effect image is displayed at a predetermined probability (for example, 10%) when a game in which the game is not won in the pseudo-bonus state in the CZ state is executed. By displaying a notification image in which the main character does not wake up, an effect of notifying that the prize is not won in the pseudo-bonus state is executed.

In addition, when the game is executed after the 10th game in the CZ state, a lottery for ending the CZ state is performed. If the lottery for ending the CZ state is won, the screen is gradually darkened during the game execution. Then, after the game ends, the entire screen becomes dark, and an effect is executed informing that the CZ state has ended.
Also, when the game is executed after the 10th game in the CZ state, even if the ending lottery is not won (continued), the effect of gradually darkening the screen is executed with a predetermined probability in the same manner as described above. In this case, the screen brightens again after the game ends, and an effect is executed to inform that the CZ state will continue.

Note that the effect for notifying the presence or absence of the winning of the pseudo-bonus state during the CZ state may be other than the above. The presence or absence of transition to the pseudo-bonus state may be notified based on the result of .

・Transition processing from CZ state to normal game state (arrow d1 in FIG. 3)
In the CZ state, if the ending lottery for the CZ state is won without winning the transition lottery for the pseudo-bonus state, the game is shifted to the normal game state after the end of the game.
At this time, after the game ends, the screen of the main display 8 becomes black, and the end of the CZ state is notified without shifting to the pseudo-bonus state.
In addition, when the CZ state ends and the game state shifts to the normal game state, the game section continues as the advantageous section, but the game section may be shifted from the advantageous section to the normal section.

In addition, at the time of transition from the CZ state to the normal game state, under the control of the main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20, notification of setting related information (setting suggestion information) that can suggest the setting value set by the probability setting device 14 You may notify by means (main display 8, speaker 9). For example, on the main display 8 and the sub display 17, a predetermined character out of a plurality of characters is displayed. Since the characters to be displayed are selected according to the selection probabilities preset according to the respective set values of the probability setting device 14, it is possible to predict the set values to some extent from the displayed characters.

(pseudo bonus state)
In the pseudo-bonus state as a special game state, in the game during the pseudo-bonus state, as notification of an operation mode advantageous to the player, push-order navigation for the push-order bell role is executed, and medals can be obtained extremely. It is an easy game state.

The pseudo-bonus state continues for a predetermined period, and an AT state transition lottery is performed in a predetermined game executed during that period.
In the first embodiment, the pseudo-bonus state is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 20 games).

During the pseudo-bonus state, push-order navigation is executed, but the winning probability of the push-order bell role is such that if the player executes the game according to the push-order navigation, medals will increase. Therefore, if the AT state shift lottery is won during the pseudo-bonus state in which a large number of medals can be obtained, the AT state occurs after the pseudo-bonus state ends, so that the player can obtain a certain amount of medals. At the same time, it becomes possible to execute the game for generating the next pseudo-bonus state, synergistically creating a state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the first game after transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state, under the control of the main control device 10, the period from the operation of the start lever 3 until the operation of the stop button 5 becomes valid is longer than in the normal game. During the period, after the reels 4 are rotated forward, a pseudo-game (announcement pseudo-game) in which a so-called reel effect is performed in which a special symbol combination on the reels 4 is temporarily stopped and then rotated again is executed, and a pseudo-bonus. You are notified that the condition has occurred.
In addition, instead of temporarily stopping the special symbol combination ("7, 7, 7", etc.) by executing the notification pseudo game in the first game that has shifted to the pseudo bonus state, a predetermined combination (for example, a replay combination) Assuming that the pseudo-bonus state is started in the next game after winning, when the predetermined combination is won, if the reels 4 are stopped in a predetermined pressing order (for example, "5c→5b→5a"), a special symbol combination is generated. A special symbol combination can be formed one game before the start of the pseudo-bonus state by controlling the stop of the reels 4 so as to stop them and informing them of the predetermined pushing order when the predetermined combination is won. good too.

The period during which the notification pseudo-game is performed is set to, for example, 15 seconds, and the operation of the stop button 5 is disabled during this period, so the game cannot proceed even if the reels 4 are operating. .
At the end of the notification pseudo-game, the special symbol combination ("7, 7, 7", etc.) is temporarily stopped (automatically stopped), so the pseudo-bonus state is the same as the AT state in terms of game content. However, it looks as if a so-called bonus state (real bonus state) has occurred, and is differentiated from the AT state.

In addition, when the notification pseudo-game ends, the reel 4 automatically starts rotating in the forward rotation, and the operation of the stop button 5 becomes effective and the game starts, and from this point on, the pseudo-bonus state is entered. game stop operation is possible in the same way as in a normal game.
Further, during the reel effect, under the control of the sub-controller 20, the main display 8 displays an effect image corresponding to the reel effect to notify the occurrence of a pseudo-bonus state.

・Transition processing from pseudo-bonus state to AT state (arrow f1 in FIG. 3)
In the pseudo-bonus state, lottery processing for shifting to the AT state is performed based on the execution of each game during the pseudo-bonus state.
In the first embodiment, the AT state transition lottery process is executed for each game in the pseudo-bonus state to determine whether or not to transition to the AT state.
As a result of the AT state shift lottery process, when the condition for shifting to the AT state is established as the establishment of a special condition, the game state shifts to the AT state after the pseudo bonus state is finished.
Further, when the pseudo-bonus state ends and the state shifts to the AT state, the game section continues as the advantageous section.

In the first embodiment, the AT state transition lottery process may be any process as long as it is performed so as to transition to the AT state in a part of the pseudo-bonus state. A state transition lottery may be performed, and when a rare combination is won, an AT state transition lottery may be performed with a higher probability than when a combination other than a rare combination is won.

The AT state transition lottery process may be performed during the entire pseudo-bonus state, or at the end of the pseudo-bonus state, during a predetermined number of games (for example, 3 games) for performing the AT state transition lottery process. A period may be provided, and a lottery may be conducted during this period to determine whether or not to transition to the AT state.
In addition to the AT state transition lottery process in the game during the pseudo-bonus state, the AT state transition lottery process may be performed at the time of transition (start) of the pseudo-bonus state.

Further, during the pseudo-bonus state, in accordance with the execution of the game, based on the reception of control information from the main controller 10, the sub-controller 20 as the effect control means controls the main display 8 to display a predetermined A performance is performed.

For example, when a rare combination is won in a game in the pseudo-bonus state, an effect is executed to notify that the rare combination has been won.
Further, during a predetermined interval (for example, between three games) at the end of the pseudo-bonus state, a continuous effect (competition effect) is executed according to the AT state transition lottery result, and the lottery result is a transition to the AT state. In this case, the effect result that the ally character finally wins is derived, and if the lottery result does not lead to the transition to the AT state, the effect result that the ally character finally loses is derived. The transition lottery result is notified as the result of the continuous production.

The effect mode during the continuous effect is determined in advance based on the result of the AT state transition lottery, and if the lottery result is a transition to the AT state, the effect mode in which the ally character is dominant is determined. If the result of the lottery is not a shift to the AT state, a performance mode in which the teammate character is inferior is determined. However, since the AT state transition lottery process is performed even in the game while the continuous effect is being executed, the final result of the continuous effect is determined by taking into consideration the AT state transition lottery process during the continuous effect. It will be done.
In addition, when it is decided to shift to the AT state as a result of the lottery process for shifting to the AT state during the pseudo-bonus state, an effect is executed to notify that the shift to the AT state is confirmed from that time. may

In addition, during the pseudo-bonus state, the main display 8 or the sub-display 17 displays a pseudo-bonus state effect (pseudo-bonus effect) in which a predetermined character appears in order to enhance the interest of the game. In the pseudo-bonus effect, for example, an introductory image of each character that appears is displayed, and a predetermined music is output from the speaker 9 .

In addition, the AT state transition lottery during the pseudo-bonus state may be executed in addition to the above. When operated, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is stopped, but the reels 4 are stopped in an irregular operation mode different from the normal operation mode (for example, an operation mode in which the right reel 4c is first stopped). In this case, a specific replay combination in which a special combination of symbols (for example, "BAR, BAR, BAR") is stopped can be drawn, and the specific replay combination is won during a period other than the period of the lottery game during the pseudo-bonus state. If so, the state may be shifted to the AT state unconditionally (100% probability).
In this case, when a specific replay combination is won, it is preferable that the main display 8 displays an image prompting the player to aim for an irregular operation mode and a special symbol combination.

Further, the button effect may be executed during the continuous effect (competition effect) during the pseudo-bonus state.
The button effect as the operation effect is first displayed on the main display 8 (or the sub-display 17) by displaying an image simulating an operation button prompting the user to operate the effect button 2d, or character information (for example, "PUSH") instructing the operation. etc., and after that, when the instructed effect button 2d (or upper effect button 2f) is operated, a series of displaying a predetermined image on the main display 8 (or sub display 17) For example, at the end of the game in which the final game of the battle effect is executed, an image simulating an operation button or an operation image is displayed, and after that, when the instructed effect button 2d is operated, This is an effect of displaying on the main display 8 an image informing of the result of the competition lottery that has been determined.
In this case, it is preferable that the probability of executing the button effect is higher when the result of the competition lottery is winning than in the case of non-winning.

・Transition processing from the pseudo-bonus state to the normal game state (arrow b1 in FIG. 3)
In the pseudo-bonus state, if the right to shift to the AT state is not granted due to the failure of a special condition, that is, if the result of the AT state transition lottery process in the pseudo-bonus state is not successful, After the pseudo-bonus state ends, the game shifts to the normal game state.
It should be noted that the game section may not be shifted from the advantageous section to the normal section in a part of the transition to the normal game state due to the termination of the pseudo-bonus state.

In addition, at the time of transition from the pseudo-bonus state to the normal game state, under the control of the main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20, setting related information (setting suggestion information) that can suggest the setting value set by the probability setting device 14 Notification means (main display 8, sub-display 17, speaker 9) may be used for notification. For example, a predetermined character out of a plurality of characters is displayed on the main display 8 and the sub display 17, and the displayed character is selected according to the selection probability preset according to each setting value of the probability setting device 14. By making a selection by using the displayed character, it is possible to predict the set value to some extent.

(AT state)
The AT state in the first embodiment is a game in which medals can be easily obtained by performing push order navigation for the push order bell role as notification of an operation mode advantageous to the player in the game during the AT state. state.

In the first embodiment, although the details will be described later, two types of AT states, a first AT state and a second AT state having different termination conditions, are set. The type of AT state is determined, and the type of AT state is switched.
Therefore, the AT state has different end conditions depending on the type of AT state at that time, and various aspects of the AT state such as the duration can be changed.

In the case of shifting to the AT state, as in the case of shifting to the pseudo-bonus state, a notification pseudo-game is executed in the first game, and a predetermined symbol combination is pseudo-stopped on a predetermined line in the display window 6. Then, a reel effect for notifying the transition of the AT state may be executed.

In addition, during the AT state, based on the winning of a predetermined rare role, an additional lottery is performed to provide a predetermined privilege (remaining difference number, number of remaining games). The duration of the AT state is extended according to the privilege.
It should be noted that the additional lottery may be triggered by any one of them, and one of a plurality of benefits having different sizes of benefits to be given may be selected. Also, the size of the privilege to be given may be changed according to the winning combination.

In addition, in the first embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a game in the AT state, an additional specialization zone is generated for a predetermined period of time, and the number of games in this specialization zone is increased. The top-up lottery is executed at a higher level than in the top-up specialization zone.
Since the special zone is in a state that is extremely advantageous to the player, it is preferable that the predetermined condition be met with a predetermined probability when a rare combination with a low winning probability is won.

・Transition processing from AT state to pseudo bonus state (arrow i1 in FIG. 3)
During the AT state, similarly to during the normal game state, the main controller 10 performs lottery processing for shifting to the pseudo-bonus state based on the winning of a predetermined rare combination as a specific lottery result. At the time of winning a strong cherry combination, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state is performed with a predetermined probability (for example, 20%).
Further, when the state is shifted to the pseudo-bonus state during the AT state, the game section continues as the advantageous section.

When the lottery for transition to the pseudo-bonus state in the AT state is won, the AT state being executed is temporarily interrupted and the game state is shifted to the pseudo-bonus state.
Therefore, the number of remaining games in the AT state is suspended at the time of transition to the pseudo-bonus state, and when the AT state is restored again, the AT state is resumed based on the suspended remaining number of games.
Further, when the pseudo-bonus state is entered during the AT state, the pseudo-bonus state is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 20 games) as described above.

However, when the state is shifted to the pseudo-bonus state during the AT state, unlike the case where the state is shifted to the pseudo-bonus state during the normal game state, the lottery process for shifting to the AT state is not performed, and a predetermined number of games are executed. If it is done, the pseudo-bonus state will end and the AT state will be restored.

It should be noted that, when the pseudo-bonus state is entered during the AT state, an additional lottery may be performed upon winning of a predetermined combination during the pseudo-bonus state.
In addition, if the lottery for transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state is won during the AT state, the battle effect (the battle effect in which the ally character wins) is performed for a predetermined period of time (for example, three games) without immediately shifting to the pseudo-bonus state. ) is executed, the pseudo-bonus state may be entered.
In addition, even if a predetermined rare role is won during the AT state and the player does not win the transition lottery for the pseudo-bonus state, a battle effect (a battle effect in which the teammate character loses) may be executed.

・Transition processing from AT state to normal game state (arrow h1 in FIG. 3)
In the AT state, when the end condition is met, the normal game state is entered after the end of the AT state.
Also, when the AT state ends and the game state shifts to the normal game state, the game section shifts from the advantageous section to the normal section.
It should be noted that the advantageous section may be continued in a part of the transition to the normal game state due to the end of the AT state.

At the end of the AT state, an AT end state is set for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds). During the AT end state, the progress of the game is temporarily disabled, and after the end of the AT end state, the normal game state is entered. It will be done.
During the AT end state, under the control of the main controller 10 and the sub-controller 20, the notifying means notifies setting-related information capable of suggesting the setting value set by the probability setting device 14. FIG. For example, a predetermined image is displayed by the main display 8 and the sub-display 17 and a predetermined sound is output from the speaker 9 .
As described above, the gaming state is changed in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment.

[Lottery table used to determine the number of ceiling games in the main controller]
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the lottery for the ceiling game number during execution of the game in the normal game state in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described.
The main controller 10 selects the ceiling game number in the subsequent normal game state when the advantageous interval transition condition is satisfied (for example, winning the bell combination) in the normal interval in the normal game state.

When the number of games in the normal game state reaches the ceiling number of games selected and set, a pseudo-bonus state is generated as a privilege.
In the first embodiment, the pseudo-bonus state can also occur when a transition lottery is won when a predetermined winning combination (for example, a rare winning combination) is won during the normal game state. A pseudo-bonus state is generated when the number of games is executed.

Further, when determining the number of ceiling games, main controller 10 first determines a zone in which a predetermined range of number of games for roughly determining the number of ceiling games is defined, and determines the range of number of games in the determined zone. The ceiling number of games is determined by selecting the number of games of 1 from among them.
Four types of zones 1 to 4 are set in advance, and the zones are set at predetermined intervals. Therefore, when the actual number of games reaches these four types of zones, the possibility of a pseudo-bonus state occurring increases, and the player's sense of anticipation increases at each predetermined timing. .

The selectable range of ceiling games in each zone is 50 to 100 games in Zone 1, 250 to 299 games in Zone 2, 450 to 499 games in Zone 3, and 750 to 800 games in Zone 4. It has become.

Therefore, for example, when zone 1 is selected, the number of ceiling games is determined with a relatively small number of games, and the game progresses in a manner advantageous to the player. is selected, the number of ceiling games, which is a relatively large number of games, is determined, and the game progresses in a manner disadvantageous to the player. However, even if zone 4 is selected, since the maximum value is set to 800 games, the pseudo-bonus state will always occur before the maximum number of games are executed.

In addition, the main controller 10 performs a process of determining the game mode when the normal section shifts to the advantageous section.
The game mode is set to a normal mode in which any one of the zones 1 to 4 can be selected, and a heaven mode in which only zone 1 is selected. One of the game modes is selected based on the set value of .
Therefore, when the heaven mode is selected, the pseudo-bonus state will always occur within 100 games.
It should be noted that the probability of selecting heaven mode is set to increase as the set value in the probability setting device 14 increases.

FIG. 4 shows an internal lottery table used for lottery for the number of ceiling games when the normal mode is switched to the advantageous period when the normal mode is selected.
In the lottery for the number of ceiling games when the normal mode is selected, the zone for determining the number of ceiling games is first determined using the internal lottery table shown in FIG. The number of games is determined, and when determining the zone, the random number lottery for the zone lottery is performed by the main controller 10. In FIG. , and indicates the number of random numbers in the case of winning in each zone.

As shown in FIG. 4, for example, when the set value in the probability setting device 14 is set to 1, zone 1 is selected with a probability of 48/256, zone 2 is selected with a probability of 16/256, and zone 2 is selected with a probability of 16/256. Zone 3 is selected with a probability of /256, and zone 4 is selected with a probability of 128/256.

Further, although detailed description is omitted, even when the set values in the probability setting device 14 are set 2 to 6, one of the zones is selected and determined with each probability shown in FIG.

Although not shown, after each zone is determined, a lottery is held to determine the number of ceiling games set in each zone. to be determined.
For example, when zone 1 is determined, any number of games from 50 games to 100 games is determined as the number of ceiling games.

Incidentally, when the heaven mode is selected, any number of ceiling games is determined within the zone 1 range.
The number of ceiling games within each zone is determined based on the random numbers for ceiling game number lottery that are extracted when the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous section are satisfied, as well as the random number extraction for the zone lottery. Although the number of games is drawn equally, the lottery process may be performed so as to increase the selection rate of the predetermined number of ceiling games in each zone.

Since the number of ceiling games is determined as described above, when the heaven mode is selected, the number of ceiling games within 100 games is always selected.
Also, when the normal mode is selected, the higher the set value in the probability setting device 14, the higher the probability that a smaller number of ceiling games will be selected.

Also, when the setting value is an even value, the probability that zone 1 will be selected is relatively low compared to when the setting value is an odd value, but the probability that zones 2 and 3 will be selected is high. In the case of , a ceiling game number smaller than the odd number is difficult to be selected, but a ceiling game number larger than the odd number is also difficult to be selected.
On the other hand, when the set value is an odd value, the probability of selecting zone 1 is relatively higher than when the setting value is even, but the probability of selecting zone 4 is also high. A ceiling game number smaller than an even number is likely to be selected, but a large ceiling game number is also likely to be selected.

It should be noted that, in the normal section, if the rare hand is won, the advantageous section transition condition may be satisfied. It is also possible to increase the probability of being selected and further reduce the probability of selecting a relatively large number of games in zone 3 or zone 4.
In addition, in the first embodiment, when the pseudo-bonus state ends without AT state transition, the transition is made to the normal section. The interval may be continued, and in this case, it is preferable to reset the number of ceiling games when the pseudo-bonus state ends.
Lottery for the number of ceiling games is executed as described above.

[Transition of game state in AT state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the game state transition during the AT state will be described.
As described above, in the first embodiment, two types of AT states are set: the first AT state and the second AT state.

The first AT state as the first special game state is a so-called differential number management type AT state. The continuation period is managed so that the termination condition 1 is satisfied.
On the other hand, the second AT state as the second special game state is a so-called game number management type AT state, and the number of games executed during the AT state exceeds a preset upper limit value, resulting in a second AT state. The continuation period is managed so that the termination condition is satisfied.

The main controller 10 manages the duration of the AT state by controlling the AT state to either the first AT state or the second AT state.
That is, the main control device 10, as a special game state, a first special game state (first AT state) in which the special game state ends based on the establishment of a predetermined first end condition, A special game state control means capable of controlling either a second special game state (second AT state) in which the special game state ends based on the establishment of a second end condition different from the end condition of of.

FIG. 5 shows a game state transition mode during the AT state realized by the control of the main control device 10. As shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 5, in the main controller 10, when the AT state transition condition (start condition) is satisfied, first, the state is shifted to the first AT state.
Therefore, at the start of the AT state, a transition is made to the first AT state of the difference number management type, the initial remaining difference number of sheets (for example, 100 sheets) is set, and the first AT state corresponding to this remaining difference number of sheets occurs. It will happen.

Then, when the game is executed during the 1st AT state and the remaining difference number is 0 or less, that is, when the difference number during the 1st AT state exceeds the upper limit number (+100) and the first end condition is met, The AT state ends when the first AT state ends.
That is, the main control device 10 as special game state control means enables the establishment of the first end condition based on the number of game media acquired by the player during the first special game state (first AT state). .

On the other hand, if the AT state switching condition is satisfied in the first AT state before the first termination condition is satisfied, the first AT state is switched to the second AT state (arrow a2 in FIG. 5). ).
That is, the main control device 10 as a special game state control means is provided with a special game state switching control means capable of executing switching control from the first AT state to the second AT state based on establishment of a predetermined condition in the first AT state. of.
Therefore, in the middle of the AT state, a change is made from the difference number management type AT state to the game number management type AT state, and the management of the duration period is changed.

In the first embodiment, the switching condition for switching to the second AT state is a predetermined probability (for example, , 30%).
Therefore, when the predetermined rare combination is won, a switching lottery is executed in the main control unit 10 to determine whether or not to switch to the second AT state, and when the switching lottery is won, the switching condition is established. As a result, the first AT state ends (ends midway) in the game, and the next game shifts to the second AT state.

Further, when a predetermined rare combination (for example, a strong cherry combination) is won in the game in the first AT state, for example, an image is displayed on the main display 8 to notify that the predetermined rare combination has been won. A switching effect is executed by displaying an effect image for notifying the presence or absence of switching to the second AT state.
For example, at the start of a game in which a predetermined rare role is won in a game in the first AT state, a treasure box image simulating a treasure box is displayed on the main display 8 to start a switching effect, and a predetermined character is selected during game execution. A moving image of opening the treasure box image is displayed to proceed with the switching performance, and after the end of the game, the opening of the treasure box image displays an image of revealing the contents, thereby ending the switching performance.

Then, when the contents of the treasure box image disclosed at the end of the switching effect are empty, it is reported that the switching lottery was not won, that is, switching to the second AT state is not performed. The first AT state will continue as it is, and if a treasure comes out from the contents of the treasure box image disclosed at the end of the switching effect, it means that the switching lottery has been won, that is, switching to the second AT state. Although it is performed, it is notified and the switching to the second AT state is performed.
Note that the switching effect may be executed by a continuous effect (competition effect, etc.) over a plurality of games.

After switching to the second AT state, the state is shifted to the number-of-games management type second AT state. When the switching is decided, the initial number of remaining games is set, and the second AT state for the number of remaining games is set. will occur.
Then, when the number of remaining games is 0 or less due to the execution of the game during the second AT state, that is, when the number of games executed during the second AT state exceeds the upper limit number and the second end condition is satisfied, the second end condition is satisfied. The AT state ends when the 2AT state ends.
That is, the main control device 10 as a special game state control means makes it possible to satisfy the second end condition based on the number of games executed during the second special game state (second AT state).
After switching to the second AT state, switching to the first AT state is not performed again.

In addition, the initial number of remaining games set when switching to the second AT state is preset in the slot machine 1 with reference to the remaining difference number in the first AT state at that time. The value obtained by dividing the net increase in the number of medals per game by the expected value is set as the initial number of remaining games.
In the first embodiment, the expected value of the net increase in the number of medals per game (the number of medals actually increased) is set by the winning probability of the bell role in the order of pushing, and is about 3 medals per game. It's becoming

Therefore, for example, when the state is switched to the second AT state when the remaining difference number of cards is 60, the initial number of remaining games in the second AT state is 20 games.
As a result, when switching to the second AT state is performed, the number of remaining games that provides an expected value for the net increase in the number of medals equivalent to the number of remaining difference in the first AT state at that time is given. of.

In this way, when switching to the second AT state is performed, the initial remaining number of games in the second AT state is determined, and the initial remaining number of games in the second AT state is used as the condition for ending the second AT state ( Since the second end condition) is stipulated, the end condition for the second AT state is determined according to the remaining difference number of sheets to be updated during the first AT state.
That is, the main control device 10 as a special game state switching control means is information updated during the first special game state (first AT state) and is information related to the establishment of the first end condition (remaining difference number), it is possible to set a second end condition for the switched second special game state (second AT state).

As described above, in the first embodiment, during the AT state, either the first AT state or the second AT state having different end conditions occurs. Therefore, it becomes possible to execute a highly interesting game.
That is, in the AT state of the difference number management type, the duration is managed according to the number of medals actually paid out regardless of the number of games paid out, so that games without paying out medals are executed. The AT state is characterized in that the player does not feel dissatisfied even when the player is hit.

On the other hand, in the AT state of the number-of-games management type, even if a large amount of medals are paid out, the AT state continues until the prescribed number of games is executed, so that a large amount of medals are paid out. The AT state is characterized in that the anticipation continues until the specified number of games are played even if the game is played.
That is, it is possible to provide game contents that change the player's sense of security and expectations according to the type of AT state.

Further, as will be described later, in the first embodiment, the control is performed so that the player is more advantageous in the second AT state than in the first AT state. The player will be interested in switching to the second AT state, and if the state is switched to the second AT state, the expectation for winning medals will be improved.
That is, by switching to the second AT state, it is possible to provide game contents that improve the interest of the game and the player's sense of expectation.

Further, the second end condition for the switched second AT state can be set on the basis of the difference in the number of sheets remaining, which is information updated during the first AT state and is related to the establishment of the first end condition. Even when the switching between the 1AT state and the 2nd AT state is performed, the 1st AT state and the 2nd AT state can be associated with each other, and the interest during the AT state can be improved.
Further, since the duration of the second AT state is changed according to the end time of the first AT state, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the end time of the first AT state, and the first AT state. is terminated early, the duration of the second AT state becomes longer, so that the player's sense of expectation can be improved.

Also, the first end condition can be satisfied based on the number of game media acquired by the player during the first AT state, and the second end condition can be satisfied based on the number of games executed during the second AT state. Therefore, it is possible to clarify the difference in the game mode between the first AT state and the second AT state, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game during the AT state.

In the first embodiment, the predetermined condition (switching condition) for switching to the second AT state is when a predetermined rare combination (for example, a strong cherry combination) is won in the game during the first AT state. Although it is assumed to be established with a predetermined probability (for example, 30%), the predetermined condition may be other than the above. It may be the case that the number of games executed in 1 reaches a predetermined number.

Also, the setting of the initial number of remaining games at the time of switching to the second AT state may be other than the above.
Also, a predetermined number of remaining games may be set at the initial stage regardless of the number of remaining coins in the first AT state. In this case, it is preferable to set the initial number of remaining games such that the expected value for the net increase in the number of medals is higher than the number of remaining games at the end of the first AT state.
Also, the number of remaining games in the second AT state may be determined by lottery based on the number of remaining coins in the first AT state. In this case, it is preferable to conduct a lottery so that the number of remaining games increases as the number of remaining coins increases.
As described above, the game state transition is performed during the AT state.

[Additional lottery during AT state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the additional lottery during the AT state will be described.
As mentioned above, during the AT state, an additional lottery is performed to grant benefits based on the lottery result of the role, and if the additional lottery is won, the duration of the AT state is extended according to the benefits granted. It will be done.

In the first embodiment, as the AT state, the first AT state and the second AT state, which are different in control related to the duration, are provided. He is trying to make the provision mode differ.
That is, when winning the extra lottery in the game in the 1st AT state, the main controller 10 adds a predetermined number of medals to the number of remaining difference as a privilege, and adds a predetermined number of medals to the number of remaining difference in the game in the 2nd AT state. , a predetermined number of games is added to the number of remaining games as a privilege.

Therefore, when winning the extra lottery, in the 1st AT state, the remaining difference number of sheets increases, and the duration is extended accordingly, and in the 2nd AT state, the remaining game number increases, so the continuation period is continued accordingly. The period will be extended.

FIG. 6 shows the winning probability at the time of the additional lottery in the main controller 10, that is, the probability of awarding the privilege when winning the additional lottery opportunity during the AT state.
In addition, in the first embodiment, the trigger combination for the additional lottery is set to the rare combination, but other combinations may be used.

First, as shown in FIG. 6(a), in the game in the first AT state, if a weak rare combination is won, there is a 50% chance that 0 cards are added (added) to the remaining difference number. It is decided that it will not be done, it is decided that 10 cards will be added (added) to the remaining difference number with a probability of 30%, and 30 cards will be added (added) to the remaining difference number with a probability of 17%. is determined, and it is determined that 50 cards are added (added) to the remaining difference number with a probability of 3%.

Similarly, in the game in the 1st AT state, if a strong rare combination is won, 0 cards are added (added) to the remaining difference number with a probability of 0%. 10 is determined to be added (added) to the remaining difference number with a probability of 10%. It is determined that 50 is to be added (added) to the remaining difference number.

Next, as shown in FIG. 6(b), in a game in the second AT state, if a weak rare role is won, there is a 50% chance that 0 games are added (added) to the number of remaining games. will not be played, 10 games will be added (added) to the number of remaining games with a probability of 30%, and 20 games will be added (added) to the number of remaining games with a probability of 17%. It is determined that 50 games will be added (added) to the number of remaining games with a probability of 3%.

Similarly, in a game in the second AT state, if a strong rare role is won, 0 games are added (added) to the number of remaining games with a probability of 0%. 10 games will be added (added) to the number of remaining games with a probability of 10%, 20 games will be added (added) to the number of remaining games with a probability of 30%, and 10%. It is determined that 50 games are added (added) to the number of remaining games.

Since the additional lottery is performed as described above, there is a possibility that the addition will be performed when the rare role is won in both the 1st AT state and the 2nd AT state, and the strong rare role has been won rather than the weak rare role. In that case, the probability of winning the top draw and the probability of being awarded a larger privilege increases.
Therefore, when the rare combination is won, the player's expectation can be improved, and when the strong rare combination is won, the player's expectation can be further improved.

Also, even if the player wins the extra lottery with the same rare combination and the same probability, the second AT state gives a higher advantage to the player than the first AT state.
That is, for example, when winning a strong rare role and winning the extra lottery with a probability of 30%, in the case of the first AT state, 30 medals will be added, but in the second AT state In this case, 20 games, which can be expected to increase the number of medals by 60, are added.

Therefore, since the additional lottery is more advantageous to the player in the second AT state, the second AT state becomes a special game state more advantageous to the player than the first AT state, and the game is played during the AT state. The player expects to be switched to the second AT state, and when the state is switched to the second AT state, the player's expectation can be improved.

Note that the odds of winning each additional lottery and the size of the privilege to be granted may be other than those described above, as long as the tendency of the above-described additional lottery can be formed.
Also, when a strong rare combination is won in the 1st AT state, there is a possibility that a switching lottery to the 2nd AT state is also performed. Alternatively, only the switching lottery may be preferentially executed, and if the switching lottery is not won, an additional lottery may be performed.
As described above, the additional lottery during the AT state is performed.

[Modification 1 of the first embodiment]
Next, Modification 1 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 9. FIG.
In the modification 1 of the first embodiment, only the control related to the extra lottery in the game in the AT state is different from the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, and the rest is the same as the slot machine 1 described above. Since they are similar, only different points will be described.

First, in Modification 1 of the first embodiment, the first AT state occurs at the initial stage of the AT state as described above.
In the game during the 1st AT state, if the winning combination (rare combination) for the additional lottery is won, an additional lottery for determining whether or not a predetermined number of medals is added to the number of remaining difference is performed in the same manner as described above. When winning the extra lottery, the remaining number of sheets is increased by the extra lottery, and the duration is extended by that amount.

Furthermore, in the game in the 1st AT state, if you win the additional lottery trigger role (rare role), in addition to the above-mentioned extra lottery related to the increase in the remaining difference number, the extra lottery related to the increase in the number of remaining games is also done at the same time.
The extra lottery related to the increase in the number of remaining games is an extra lottery for the number of remaining games in the second AT state that may be switched after that time, and if the extra lottery is won, the extra lottery will be switched after that. The number of possible remaining games in the second AT state increases.

That is, in the game during the 1st AT state, if you win the additional lottery trigger role (rare role), the additional lottery related to the increase in the remaining difference number with respect to the 1st AT state occurring at that time (hereinafter referred to as the normal extra lottery) In addition to this, an additional lottery (hereinafter also referred to as a preparation additional lottery) related to an increase in the number of remaining games for the second AT state that may occur thereafter is also performed at the same time.
Therefore, in the case of winning the extra lottery (preparatory extra lottery) related to the increase in the number of remaining games for the second AT state, the number of games is added (added) in advance in the state that has not yet been switched to the second AT state. It becomes.
Then, when the state is switched to the second AT state after that, the number of games to be added in advance is added to the initial remaining games given when the second AT state is switched.

There is a possibility that the 2nd AT state will not be switched even if the preliminary extra lottery is won, but in this case, the benefit determined by winning the extra lottery will be invalidated.
However, if the switch to the second AT state is not performed despite winning the additional preparation lottery, the main display will be based on the lottery result of the invalidated additional preparation lottery, although the details will be described later. A predetermined privilege image is displayed on the device 8 to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied.

FIG. 7 shows the winning probability at each additional lottery in the first AT state in the main controller 10, that is, the probability of awarding a privilege when winning the additional lottery opportunity during the AT state.
In addition, although the trigger role of each additional lottery is set to a rare role, other roles may be used.

First, FIG. 7(a) shows, in a game in the first AT state, an additional lottery related to an increase in the number of remaining difference sheets, that is, an additional lottery (normal additional lottery) related to the first AT state executed in the first AT state. It shows the winning probability for each winning combination.

As shown in FIG. 7(a), in the game in the 1st AT state, at the time of the additional lottery (normal additional lottery) when each rare combination is won, the same as the additional lottery during the 1st AT state in the first embodiment described above. Winning the addition with a probability of , and the addition (addition) of a predetermined number of medals is performed.
The probability of winning the extra lottery (normal extra lottery) when winning each role and the number of medals to be added at that time are the same as described above (see FIG. 6(a)), so the explanation here is omitted.
Then, when winning the normal addition lottery, the number of corresponding medals is added to the number of remaining difference, and the first AT state is extended by that amount.

Also, as shown in FIG. 7(b), in the game in the 1st AT state, when each rare combination is won, in addition to the normal additional lottery, an additional lottery related to the 2nd AT state that may be switched afterwards (Preliminary extra lottery) is also performed at the same time, the extra lottery is won with the same probability as described above, and the predetermined number of games is temporarily stored.
Further, the additional preparation lottery is continuously executed even after winning the additional preparation lottery, and when the additional preparation lottery is won again, the corresponding number of games is added and stored to the number of games temporarily stored.

The probability of winning the extra lottery (preparatory extra lottery) when winning each role and the number of games added at that time are the same as described above (see FIG. 6(b)), so the explanation here is omitted.
Then, when the state is switched to the second AT state, as in the first embodiment described above, the initial number of remaining games is awarded based on the remaining difference number of sheets in the first AT state. If so, the number of games temporarily stored is added to the initial number of remaining games when switching to the second AT state, and the second AT state is extended by that amount.

In addition, since the normal extra lottery and the preparation extra lottery are performed separately, there is a case where, for example, when one rare role is won, the normal extra lottery is won and the preparation extra lottery is won.

In this way, the number of remaining games in the second AT state changes according to the additional preparation lottery, so the second termination condition in the second AT state is changed according to the additional preparation lottery.
Therefore, during the first AT state, a preparatory additional lottery for changing the second termination condition in the second AT state is performed in advance.

That is, the main control device 10 as a special game state switching control means performs a lottery (preparation additional lottery) that can change the second end condition in the second special game state (second AT state), the first special game state ( A change lottery control means that can be executed in advance during the first AT state) is provided.
In addition, the main controller 10 as change lottery control means, in a predetermined game in the first special game state (first AT state), a lottery capable of changing the first end condition in the first special game state, It is possible to execute both a lottery that can change the second end condition in the switched second special game state (second AT state).

As described above, in the first modified example of the first embodiment, in the game during the first AT state, the preparatory additional lottery is performed in addition to the normal additional lottery. In addition to the extra lottery related to the increase in the number of remaining games at that time, the extra lottery related to the increase in the number of remaining games is also performed in advance for the second AT state that may be switched after that.

Therefore, in the game during the first AT state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game, and also to improve the sense of anticipation for both the first AT state and the second AT state.
In addition, when winning the extra preparation lottery, it is possible to greatly improve the player's expectation even before the switching to the second AT state is performed.
In addition, in a predetermined game in the first AT state, both the normal additional lottery and the preparation additional lottery are executed, so it is possible to greatly improve the player's sense of expectation in the game.

In addition, the additional winning probability and the privilege given in the normal additional lottery and the preparation additional lottery may be other than the above, for example, all or part of the trigger role of the additional lottery may be different between the normal additional lottery and the preparation additional lottery. can be
In addition, the number of games added to the initial number of remaining games in the second AT state by winning the preparation extra lottery is added. You may make it decide only by lottery. Therefore, in this case, the right to continue the second AT state will be lost unless the additional preparation lottery is won, so the additional preparation lottery also serves as a lottery to determine whether or not the condition for switching to the second AT state is established. becomes.

In addition, even if the player wins the extra preparation lottery, if the switch to the second AT state is not performed, the granted benefits are invalidated. When the end condition of the first AT state is established without switching to the second AT state, the first AT state may be extended according to the privilege given by winning the preparation additional lottery.

Next, with reference to FIG. 8, an effect (additional effect) when the normal additional lottery and the preparation additional lottery are executed in Modification 1 of the first embodiment will be described.
FIG. 8 shows an effect image on the main display 8 when the normal extra lottery and the preparation extra lottery are executed.

In the main controller 10, when a predetermined rare role is won in the game in the first AT state, the normal additional lottery and the preparation additional lottery are executed. The control information is transmitted to the sub-controller 20, and the sub-controller 20 executes the extra performance by displaying the performance image related to the normal extra lottery and the preparation extra lottery on the main display 8 based on the received control information. I'm trying
Further, in response to the execution of the additional effect on the main display 8, the speaker 9 outputs a predetermined sound effect and the lamp 11 outputs a predetermined ornamental light.

First, as shown in FIG. 8(a), during the first AT state, a first AT state image 24 is displayed on the main portion of the screen of the main display 8 to notify that the first AT state is in progress.
The first AT state image 24 may be any image that allows the player to recognize that the player is in the first AT state and that enhances interest in the first AT state. ) is displayed.

In addition, on the upper left of the screen of the main display 8, a remaining difference number image 21a ("50" in FIG. 8A) is displayed to inform the remaining difference number of sheets at that time in the first AT state. In the game of (1), the remaining difference number image 21a is updated (subtracted) and displayed according to the increase in the net increase in number of medals.
At the upper right of the screen of the main display 8, an executed game number image 21b (“20G” in FIG. 8A) that informs the number of executed games at that time in the AT state (first AT state+second AT state). is displayed, and the number-of-executed-games image 21b is updated (added) and displayed according to the execution of the game in the AT state.

It should be noted that the first AT state image 24, the remaining difference number image 21a, and the executed game number image 21b on the main display 8 will continue to be displayed in subsequent games as well.
Further, when the state is switched to the second AT state in subsequent games, the image is switched to the image for notifying the second AT state instead of the first AT state image 24, and the number of remaining games is notified instead of the remaining difference number image 21a. You will be able to switch to an image.

Next, FIG. 8(b) shows an effect image on the main display 8 from the start of the game to the time the game is being executed when a strong rare role (for example, a strong watermelon role) is won in the first AT state. is shown.

In the first embodiment including Modification 1, when the press order bell role is won in the game in the AT state, the operation order (press order) for the stop button 5 is notified in a circular frame. The pressing order navigation image 22 (the left pressing order navigation image 22a, the middle pressing order navigation image 22b, and the right pressing order navigation image 22c) displaying the numerical information to be pressed is displayed in the lower part of the screen of the main display 8. If a rare combination is won in the game, as shown in FIG. 8(b), the fact that the rare combination has been won is notified instead of numerical information in the encircling frame of each push order navigation image 22. Symbolic information (“!”) will be displayed.
Then, based on the winning of the strong rare combination, the main controller 10 performs the normal additional lottery and the preparation additional lottery.
It should be noted that the mode of notification when winning the rare combination may be other than the above, and for example, a winning effect accompanied by the appearance of a predetermined character may be executed.

Next, FIG. 8(c) shows an effect image on the main display 8 after the game is over when a strong rare combination (for example, a strong watermelon combination) is won in the first AT state. The effect image when winning both the additional lottery and the preparation additional lottery is shown.
As shown in FIG. 8(c), when the normal add-on lottery is won, the first add-on winning image 21c notifying that the normal add-on lottery has been won and the number of medals to be added (added) is displayed as the main display. It is displayed at the bottom left of the screen of the device 8.
FIG. 8(c) illustrates a case where 10 medals are added to the number of remaining coins, so an image of "+10" is displayed as the first additional winning image 21c.

On the other hand, when the preliminary extra lottery is won, a second extra winning image 21d notifying that the preliminary extra lottery has been won and the number of games to be added (added) is displayed at the bottom right of the screen of the main display 8. be done.
FIG. 8(c) illustrates a case where the number of games for 20 games is added to the number of remaining games, so an image of "+20G" is displayed as the second additional winning image 21d.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8(d), the first added winning image 21c disappears after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the first added winning image 21c and the second added winning image 21d were displayed. At the same time, the remaining difference number image 21a corresponding to the number of medals won this time is updated ("50"→"60"), and it is notified that the duration of the first AT state has been extended. .

Further, after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed since the display of the first add-on winning image 21c and the second add-on winning image 21d, the second add-on winning image 21d is erased, and the screen of the main display 8 is displayed. In the lower right corner, as a result of the preparation addition lottery, a preparation addition game number image 21e for notifying the total number of addition games won during the first AT state is displayed.

Note that FIG. 8(d) shows a case where the preparation addition lottery has not yet been won, and the preparation addition lottery has been won this time. However, if the additional preparation lottery is won again in the game after the state in which the additional preparation lottery has already been won and the additional preparation game number image 21e is displayed, The number of games to be added is added to the already displayed number-of-preparation-games image 21e.

Further, when the player immediately starts the next game after finishing the game, at that time, the first extra winning image 21c and the second extra winning image 21d are erased, the remaining difference number image 21a and the number of preparation extra games are deleted. The image 21e is updated (including appearance).
Further, the switching timing of each image related to the normal extra lottery and the preparation extra lottery is not limited to the timing described above, and may be any timing during execution of the game in which the rare combination is won or after the game is over.

In addition, when the normal addition lottery or the preparation addition lottery is not won, the first addition winning image 21c or the second addition winning image 21d may not be displayed, or the addition lottery was not won. An image (such as “sorry”) may be displayed to notify the fact.

As described above, in the first modified example of the first embodiment, when the normal additional lottery and the preparation additional lottery are performed in the game in the first AT state, the main display 8 displays the normal additional lottery and the preparation additional lottery. An additional effect related to the lottery is performed.

Therefore, in the game during the first AT state, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game, and to clearly inform the player of the lottery results of the normal additional lottery and the preparation additional lottery. Therefore, it is possible to prevent misrecognition and the like regarding each additional lottery.

In addition, the display of the number-of-games-to-be-prepared image 21e makes it possible to raise expectations for switching to the second AT state, and the expectation is further improved each time the number-of-games-to-be-prepared image 21e increases. , it is possible to efficiently improve the player's sense of expectation.
In addition, if the player wins the preliminary extra lottery multiple times, there is a possibility that the total number of extra games will not be known, but such a situation can be prevented.

Although the main display 8 is used to execute the additional effects related to the normal additional lottery and the preparation additional lottery, the sub-display 17 may be used.
Moreover, it is possible to execute a button effect accompanying the operation of the effect button 2d (or the upper effect button 2f) at the time of the additional effect.

Next, referring to FIG. 9, in the modification 1 of the first embodiment, even though the player wins the preparation additional lottery during the first AT state, the switch to the second AT state is not performed, A description will be given of an effect when the first end condition is satisfied in the 1AT state.

As described above, in the game during the first AT state, a preparatory extra lottery is performed in addition to the normal extra lottery. Since it is a privilege that functions only when the state is switched to the 2AT state, even if the provision of the privilege is determined by the result of the preparation additional lottery, the 1st AT state is terminated as it is without switching to the 2nd AT state after that. If this happens, the privilege that was scheduled to be given will be invalidated, which may cause the player to feel dissatisfied.

Therefore, in Modified Example 1 of the first embodiment, even though the provision of the privilege is determined by the result of the preparation additional lottery, if the switch to the second AT state is not performed after that, as a remedy It is possible to provide privilege information useful to the player.

FIG. 9 shows the execution and end of the final game when the first AT state ends without switching to the second AT state after that, even though the addition of the number of games has been decided by the result of the preparation addition lottery. It shows the effect image on the main display 8 later.
First, FIG. 9A shows an effect image on the main display 8 during execution of the final game in the first AT state in which the first end condition is satisfied (after medals are paid out). showing.

As shown in FIG. 9(a), in the first AT state, the main display 8 displays the first AT state image 24, the remaining difference number image 21a, and the executed game number image 21b in the same manner as described above. .
Further, when the final game in the first AT state is executed and a predetermined number of medals are paid out, and the first end condition is met, the remaining difference number image 21a is updated to indicate "0". becomes.

Further, at this time, if the result of the preparation addition lottery during the first AT state determines that the number of games should be added to the second AT state, a preparation addition game number image 21e is displayed, for example, as shown in the figure. , an image of "+30G" is displayed.

In this state, if the final game in the first AT state ends, that is, if the first AT state ends without switching to the second AT state, even though the addition of the number of games is determined according to the result of the preparation addition lottery. 9(b), the first AT state image 24 is erased, and the setting suggesting image 23 is displayed on the main portion of the screen of the main display 8 instead.
The setting suggesting image 23 is information displayed under the control of the sub-controller 20, and the sub-controller 20 is based on the control information from the main controller 10, and the setting made by the probability setting device 14 as a setting means. A setting suggestion image 23 is displayed based on the value (setting stage).

That is, the sub control device 20 can display a plurality of images as the setting suggestion image 23, and selects and displays any one of the images according to the setting value in the probability setting device 14. FIG.
For example, the sub control device 20 selects five types of images, images A to E, in which different characters are displayed, respectively, according to the selection probabilities preset according to the respective setting values of the probability setting device 14. When the setting value of the probability setting device 14 is the maximum value (setting 6), the selection rate of the image A is 1%, but the setting value is the minimum value. In the case of (setting 1), the selection rate is 80%. The rate is 30%, but when the set value is the minimum value (setting 1), the selection rate is 10%, and so on, so that each image is displayed with a different selection rate.

Therefore, as a result of selecting each image according to the set value in the probability setting device 14, an image that is more likely to be selected as the setting becomes higher and an image that is more likely to be selected as the setting becomes lower. The player can predict the set value of the probability setting device 14 to some extent.
As long as the player can predict the setting value of the probability setting device 14 to some extent, the image selection control in the setting suggestion image 23 may be other than the above.
Also, an image that definitely notifies a predetermined set value may be provided as an option.
In addition, after the final game in the first AT state is finished, the progress of the game is disabled for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), so that the next game is started without confirming the setting suggestion image 23. may be prevented.

As described above, in Modification 1 of the first embodiment, although the addition of the number of games is determined by the result of the preparation addition lottery during the first AT state, switching to the second AT state is not performed. When the first AT state ends, the setting suggesting image 23 is displayed on the main display 8, thereby providing privilege information to the player.
That is, the sub control device 20 switches to the second special game state (second AT state) even though the second end condition is changed by the main control device 10 as the change lottery control means. It is provided with a privilege imparting means (sub-controller 20) capable of imparting a predetermined privilege (displaying a setting suggesting image 23 as privilege information) when the user is not selected.

Therefore, even if the number of games to be added to the second AT state is determined by the preparation addition lottery, even if the first AT state ends without switching to the second AT state, the player is dissatisfied. It is possible to reduce the feeling.
In addition, since the setting suggestion image 23 is displayed as a relief measure for the player, the player can obtain important information for selecting a gaming machine. can be reduced.

In addition, when the number of games to be added to the second AT state is determined by the preparation addition lottery, the setting suggestion image 23 is displayed, but the number of games to be added is a predetermined number (for example, 30 games) or more. , the setting suggestion image 23 may be displayed, and if the number is less than a predetermined number (for example, 30 games), the setting suggestion image 23 may not be displayed.

In addition, as a relief measure for the player, privilege information is provided. For example, when the number of games played is 30 games or more, as a privilege, the advantageous section may be continued without shifting the game section to the normal section after the end of the AT state.
Modification 1 in the first embodiment is realized as described above.

[Modification 2 of the first embodiment]
Next, modification 2 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
In the modification 2 of the first embodiment, only the control related to the execution of the push order navigation when the push order bell combination is won is different from the slot machine 1 of the above-described first embodiment. Since it is the same as the slot machine 1, only different points will be explained.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, in the game during the pseudo-bonus state and the AT state, when the pushing-order bell role is won, the winning push-order bell role is awarded to the player. That is, the specific operation information for deriving the specific result ("bell, bell, bell") corresponding to the bell combination in the order of pressing is notified (executing navigation in the order of pressing), but the present first embodiment. In the modification 2, the execution control of the push order navigation during the AT state is different from that of the above-described first embodiment.

Specifically, when the AT state is entered as described above, the control is performed in either the first AT state or the second AT state. The execution probability of push-order navigation when winning a forward-bell role is changed.
That is, an AT state in which the execution probability of push order navigation is relatively high and an AT state in which the execution probability of push order navigation is relatively low can be generated, and an AT state in which the execution probability of push order navigation is relatively low. In , there is a relatively high possibility that a game will be executed in which push order navigation is not executed even though the push order bell role is won, and the possibility that the player will not obtain medals is correspondingly increased. of.

FIG. 10 shows execution probabilities (probabilities of notifying specific operation information) of push order navigation when the push order bell combination is won for each type of AT state in main controller 10 .
As shown in FIG. 10, when winning the push order bell role in the first AT state, the push order navigation is not executed with a probability of 40%, and the push order navigation is executed with a probability of 60%. Forward navigation execution control is performed.
On the other hand, when the winning of the push order bell role is won in the second AT state, the push order navigation is not not executed, and the execution control of the push order navigation is performed so that the push order navigation is executed with a probability of 100%. .

Then, the main control unit 10 performs execution control of the push order navigation when the push order bell combination is won with the above probability, and when it is decided to execute the push order navigation, the sub control unit 20 as the notification control means Control information related to push order navigation is transmitted, and the sub control device 20 controls the main display 8, the navigation lamp 12, and the speaker 9. Various notifications corresponding to forward navigation are executed.
Therefore, in the second AT state, the probability that the pushing order navigation is executed when winning the pushing order bell combination is higher in the second AT state than in the first AT state. It becomes an AT state that is advantageous for

As described above, in the modification 2 of the first embodiment, in the first AT state, the push order navigation is executed with a predetermined probability (60%) when the push order bell combination is won. Therefore, in the second AT state, the push order navigation is executed with a higher probability (100%) than in the first AT state.
That is, the sub control device 20 as the notification control means, when a game capable of deriving a specific result ("Bell Bell Bell") is executed, during the first special game state (first AT state) Specific operation information can be notified (execution of push order navigation) with a probability of 1 (60%), and a second probability (100%) higher than the first probability during the second special game state (second AT state) ) enables notification of specific operation information.

Therefore, it is possible to generate various AT states in which the manner of execution of the push order navigation is changed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Further, when the state is switched to the second AT state, the execution probability of the push order navigation when the bell combination is won is higher than that in the first AT state, so the player's expectation when the state is switched to the second AT state. can be further enhanced.
In addition, in the first AT state, the player will play the game while anticipating the switch to the second AT state, so that the player's desire to play can be further enhanced.

It should be noted that the execution probability of the push order navigation in each AT state is higher in the second AT state than in the first AT state, if the execution probability of the push order navigation at the time of winning the push order bell combination is higher than that in the first AT state, as described above. Anything other than
Further, two types of second AT states may be further provided, and the execution probability of push order navigation in one of the second AT states may be set to 80% and the other may be set to 100%.
Further, when the push order navigation is executed, the push order navigation is executed by the sub-controller 20 according to the control information from the main controller 10, but the main controller 10 can directly control the notification means. Alternatively, for example, the main controller 10 may directly control the navigation lamp 12 to perform the push order navigation.
Modification 2 in the first embodiment is realized as described above.

[Modification 3 of the first embodiment]
Next, a modification 3 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 11 .
In the modification 3 of the first embodiment, only the additional lottery during the second AT state and the control related to the game state transition during the AT state are different from the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above. Others are the same as those of the slot machine 1 described above, so only different points will be described.

First, the additional lottery during the second AT state in Modification 3 of the first embodiment will be described.
In the first modified example of the first embodiment described above, during the first AT state, when the rare combination is won, an extra lottery related to an increase in the number of remaining difference sheets as a normal extra lottery and a remaining lottery as a preparation extra lottery An additional lottery related to an increase in the number of games is executed. In the third modification, as in the first modification, the normal additional lottery and the preparation additional lottery are performed.

Furthermore, in the third modification of the first embodiment, even after switching to the second AT state, both the normal additional lottery and the preparation additional lottery are executed when the rare combination is won.
However, since the extra lottery is performed after switching to the second AT state, the extra lottery related to the increase in the number of remaining games is the normal extra lottery, and the extra lottery related to the increase in the remaining difference number is the preparation extra lottery.

Therefore, in the case of winning the lottery for additional preparation after switching to the second AT state, the number of medals related to the duration of the first AT state is added regardless of the duration of the second AT state at that time. It becomes.
The winning probabilities of each additional lottery during the 2nd AT state are controlled to be the respective winning probabilities shown in FIG. It is sufficient to perform control so as to achieve each winning probability shown in .

Then, when the second end condition is satisfied in the second AT state, if the preparation additional lottery (additional lottery related to the increase in the remaining difference number of sheets) in the second AT state is won, that is, the second AT state At the end of the game, if there are medals added as a result of the preparation addition lottery, as shown in FIG. 11, the condition for switching the first AT state is established, and switching to the first AT state is performed. (arrow b2 in FIG. 11).
The switched 1st AT state will continue to be managed with the added number of medals as the initial number of remaining medals.

Further, after switching to the first AT state is performed again, the control related to switching to the second AT state is performed again in the same manner as described above. Therefore, during the AT state, it is possible to repeat the first AT state and the second AT state.
It should be noted that other game state transitions and the like shown in FIG. 11 are the same as those in the above-described first embodiment, so descriptions thereof will be omitted here.

As described above, in the third modification of the first embodiment, after switching from the first AT state to the second AT state, switching to the first AT state is performed again.
That is, the main control device 10 as a special game state switching control means, after switching from the first special game state (1st AT state) to the second special game state (2nd AT state), the first special It enables execution of switching control to the game state.

Therefore, it is possible to further diversify the game mode during the AT state, and to further improve the interest of the game.
In addition, since switching to the first AT state is performed again when the second AT state ends, it is possible to increase the player's desire to play after being disappointed by the end of the second AT state.
Further, since the repetitive control of the first AT state and the second AT state continues as long as the addition is performed, it is possible to greatly improve the player's sense of expectation.

When switching to the first AT state again, the number of medals added by the preparation addition lottery may be added to the preset initial remaining difference number (for example, 50).
Modification 3 in the first embodiment is realized as described above.

[Modification 4 of the first embodiment]
Next, a modification 4 of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
In the modification 4 of the first embodiment, only the control until switching from the first AT state to the second AT state during the AT state is different from the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above. Others are the same as those of the slot machine 1 described above, so only different points will be described.

In the first embodiment described above, in the game in the first AT state, control is performed to switch to the second AT state with a predetermined probability (eg, 30%) when a predetermined rare combination (eg, strong cherry combination) is won. However, in Modified Example 4, the first AT state is not directly switched to the second AT state, but the state is shifted to the second AT state via the ATCZ state.

FIG. 12 shows a game state transition mode realized by the control of the main controller 10 in Modification 4 of the first embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 12, in the fourth modification of the first embodiment, in the game in the first AT state, a predetermined probability (for example, 40% ) to shift the game state to the ATCZ state (arrow a3 in FIG. 12).
The ATCZ state is a so-called chance zone in which switching to the second AT state is executed with a high probability for a predetermined period (for example, 10 games). During this period, a lottery for switching to the second AT state is performed with a high probability. becomes.

For example, when winning a weak rare role, switching to the 2nd AT state is performed with a probability of 80%, and when winning a strong rare role, switching to the 2nd AT state is performed with a 100% probability, Furthermore, switching to the second AT state is performed with a probability of 10% even when the bell combination and the replay combination are won.
Therefore, instead of directly switching from the first AT state to the second AT state, the game state is once shifted to a game state in which switching to the second AT state is performed with a high probability.

Then, in the game in the ATCZ state, if the prescribed period expires without winning the switch lottery to the second AT state, the game state is shifted to the first AT state (arrow b3 in FIG. 12), If the lottery for switching to the second AT state is won during this period, the game state is shifted to the second AT state from the next game (arrow c3 in FIG. 12).
It should be noted that other game state transitions and the like shown in FIG. 11 are the same as those in the above-described first embodiment, so descriptions thereof will be omitted here.

Further, during the ATCZ state, the AT state is continuously managed by subtracting the remaining number of sheets. Therefore, even if the game state is in the ATCZ state, the continuous management of the AT state is performed following the first AT state immediately before that state, and even when the game state shifts to the first AT state again, the continuous management is taken over. Become.

Also, during the ATCZ state, under the control of the sub-controller 20, as in the CZ state during the normal game state described above, various effects such as effects for notifying the game state and effects according to the lottery results of benefits are executed. For example, an effect for notifying that the switching lottery has been performed, an effect for notifying whether the switching lottery is successful, or the like is performed.

As described above, in the fourth modification of the first embodiment, when a predetermined rare combination is won in the game in the first AT state, switching to the second AT state is performed with a higher probability than in the previous state. It is the transition to the ATCZ state that is performed.
That is, the main control device 10 as a special game state control means, the switching to the second special game state (second AT state) by the special game state switching control means (main control device 10) is high based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. Control is made possible to a high-probability special game state (ATCZ state) that is played with probability.

Therefore, it is possible to switch to the second AT state in a wider variety of ways, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
In addition, in the case of shifting to the ATCZ state, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation for a longer period than in the case where the switching lottery is performed in one game.

Also in the fourth modification of the first embodiment, in the same way as described above, a lottery for switching directly to the second AT state may be performed in the game during the first AT state. There will be a case of switching and a case of switching to the second AT state via the ATCZ state.
Also, the duration of the ATCZ state and each winning probability at the switching lottery during the ATCZ state may be other than the above.

In addition, in order to prevent the first end condition from being satisfied during the ATCZ state, when the remaining difference number of sheets is equal to or less than a predetermined number, the lottery for transition to the ATCZ state may be prohibited. .
Further, during the ATCZ state, updating of various data related to the continuation of the AT state (remaining difference number of sheets, etc.) may be interrupted. The remaining difference number of sheets at the start of the state is restored, and the first AT state is resumed.
Modification 3 in the first embodiment is realized as described above.

The slot machine 1 of the first embodiment has been described above. In the first embodiment, all games in the first AT state can be switched to the second AT state. In the above cases, switching to the second AT state may be prohibited.

Also, when the AT state is started, it is made to shift to the first AT state, but at the beginning, it is made to shift to the second AT state of the game number management type, so that the switching condition to the first AT state in the second AT state is satisfied. In this case, the state may be switched to the difference number management type first AT state.
In this case, it is preferable that the first AT state is more advantageous for the player than the second AT state.
Further, at the start of the AT state, it may be possible to select between the first AT state and the second AT state based on the player's operation (for example, betting operation).
The slot machine 1 of the first embodiment is configured as described above.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 22. FIG.

The gaming machine of the second embodiment differs from the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above only in part of the control related to the transition of the game state and part of the effect contents. It is the same as the first embodiment.
Therefore, in the second embodiment, only the points that are different from the first embodiment will be described, and the other points are the same as the above-described first embodiment, so the description will be omitted.

[Movement of game state during CZ state in the gaming machine of the second embodiment]
First, the game state transition during the CZ state in the slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14. FIG.
In the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, similar to the first embodiment described above, the transition control of each game state is performed by the main controller 10. Control differs from the first embodiment.

First, in the above-described first embodiment, when the state is shifted to the CZ state, the main controller 10 does not change the lottery control for shifting to the pseudo-bonus state during the CZ state. In the embodiment, it is possible to change the lottery control for transition to the pseudo-bonus state during the CZ state.
That is, in the second embodiment, the CZ state (first CZ state), the CZ state (second CZ state), and the CZ state (second CZ state), in which the lottery probability of transition to the pseudo-bonus state in the CZ state is relatively low, , and the main controller 10 can control the CZ state to any one of the above CZ states when shifting to the CZ state.

FIG. 13 shows the game state transition mode during the CZ state realized by the control of the main controller 10 in the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 13, in the main controller 10, during the normal game state as the first game state, a lottery for transition to the CZ state is performed, and when the condition for transition to the CZ state is satisfied by winning the transition lottery, , the game state is shifted from the normal game state to the CZ state as a second game state advantageous to the player for a predetermined period of time.

Furthermore, when the transition condition of the CZ state is satisfied, a lottery for transition to the second CZ state is performed, and when the transition condition of the second CZ state is satisfied by winning the transition lottery, the CZ state is specified as the second game state. When the transition condition of the second CZ state is not satisfied due to non-winning of the transition lottery to the second CZ state, the CZ state is the first CZ state as the normal second game state is controlled by
That is, when the lottery for the transition of the CZ state itself is won, a lottery for determining the type of the CZ state is performed, and whether the control during the CZ state is set to the first CZ state (normal second game state) by this lottery It is determined whether the second CZ state (specific second game state) should be made.

In the game during the first CZ state and the second CZ state, when the conditions for transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state are established, the game state is shifted from the CZ state to the pseudo-bonus state.
In addition, in the game during the first CZ state and the second CZ state, if the condition for transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state is not satisfied and the termination condition for the CZ state set for each CZ state is satisfied, the game state is changed to the CZ state. The state is shifted to the normal game state.

In the main controller 10, although details will be described later, a pseudo-bonus state transition lottery is performed in which the probability of transition to the pseudo-bonus state is relatively low during the period of the first CZ state, and a pseudo-bonus state is performed during the period of the second CZ state. A pseudo-bonus state transition lottery is performed so that the state transition probability is relatively high.
Therefore, the second CZ state is more advantageous for the player than the first CZ state.

Next, the CZ state transition lottery process executed by main controller 10 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.
FIG. 14 shows a CZ state transition lottery process in which a lottery for transition to the CZ state itself and a lottery process to determine whether to transition to the second CZ state, which are executed in the main controller 10, are performed. showing.

First, in step S1, it is determined whether or not the game has been executed.
This is a determination as to whether or not the game has been executed in the normal game state. If the game has been executed, the process proceeds to step S2, and if the game has not been executed, the CZ state transition lottery process is executed. finish.

Next, in step S2, it is determined whether or not the CZ state transition lottery opportunity has been won.
In step S2, when it is determined that the CZ state transition lottery trigger role (for example, weak watermelon combination) is won, the process proceeds to step S3, and when it is determined that the transition lottery trigger role is not won. ends this CZ state transition lottery process.

Next, in step S3, a CZ state transition lottery process is performed.
The transition lottery process in step S3 is a transition lottery for determining whether or not to transition to the CZ state itself regardless of the type of the CZ state. .
Although details will be described later, the probability of winning the CZ state transition lottery differs depending on the CZ low probability state and the CZ high probability state, and the probability of transitioning to the CZ state changes according to the probability state at that time. It is supposed to

Next, in step S4, it is determined whether or not the lottery for transition to the CZ state has been won.
In step S4, as a result of the CZ state transition lottery process, if it is determined that the CZ state transition lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S5, and if it is determined that the transition lottery has not been won, This CZ state transition lottery process ends.

Next, in step S5, a second CZ state transition lottery process is performed.
The transition lottery process in step S5 is a transition lottery to determine whether or not the selected CZ state is to be transitioned to the second CZ state, and whether or not to transition to the second CZ state is determined with a predetermined probability.
That is, after the decision to shift to the CZ state is made, a lottery is made to determine whether the CZ state should be the first CZ state or the second CZ state.
Although details will be described later, the probability of winning the second CZ state transition lottery is different depending on the second CZ low probability state and the second CZ high probability state, and the probability state at that time Transition to the second CZ state The probability of doing so changes.

Next, in step S6, it is determined whether or not the lottery for transition to the second CZ state has been won.
If it is determined in step S6 that the lottery for transition to the second CZ state has been won, the process proceeds to step S7.

After the second CZ state transition flag is set in step S7 and the first CZ state transition flag is set in step S8, the CZ state transition lottery process is terminated.
The first CZ state transition flag and the second CZ state transition flag indicate that the right to transition to each CZ state has been granted. When the CZ state starts, this flag is referred to, and the CZ state changes to the first CZ state according to the flag. state or the second CZ state.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the CZ state is controlled to either the first CZ state or the second CZ state having different probabilities of shifting to the pseudo-bonus state.
Therefore, it is possible to diversify the game during the CZ state and improve the interest of the game.
Further, the player's expectation can be changed according to the type of CZ state, and the player's expectation can be improved in the case of shifting to the second CZ state.

After the CZ state transition lottery process is performed, the second CZ state transition lottery process is performed. A lottery form other than the above may be used as long as is determined.
Also, three or more types of CZ states may be provided.
In addition, when the CZ state transition lottery is won, the transition to the CZ state may be made from the next game, or the main display 8 may continuously produce the CZ state for a predetermined number of games (for example, 3 games). After the continuous performance) is executed, the state may be shifted to the CZ state. Further, when the CZ state transition lottery opportunity is won but the CZ state transition lottery is not won (or part of it), the CZ state fake continuous effect may be executed.
As described above, the game state is changed during the CZ state in the gaming machine of the second embodiment.

[Probability State for Transition of CZ State in Gaming Machine of Second Embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the probabilistic states for transition to the CZ state realized by the control of the main controller 10 in the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described.

In the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, as described above, the main controller 10 controls the CZ state itself (first CZ state or second CZ state) based on the winning of a predetermined rare combination (for example, weak watermelon combination). ), and if the transition lottery is won, the game state is shifted to the CZ state.

In addition, the main controller 10, regarding the transition lottery of the CZ state itself (the first CZ state or the second CZ state) in the normal game state, the CZ low probability state that wins the CZ state with a relatively low probability, and the relatively high probability It is possible to control in two types of probability states (probability state A) of a CZ high probability state in which the CZ state is won with probability, and this probability state A makes it possible to change the degree of expectation for the transition of the CZ state itself.

Further, as described above, when main controller 10 decides to shift to the CZ state itself, main controller 10 performs a transition lottery (selection lottery) to determine whether the CZ state is to be transitioned to the first CZ state or to the second CZ state. ), but also regarding the transition lottery related to this second CZ state, the second CZ low probability state that wins the second CZ state with a relatively low probability and the second CZ state with a relatively high probability It is possible to control in two types of probability states (probability state B) of the second CZ high probability state as the specific first game state, and this probability state B can change the degree of expectation for the transition to the second CZ state.

FIG. 15 shows the transition according to the progress of the game in the probability state A that defines the transition probability of the CZ state itself and the probability state B that defines the transition probability of the second CZ state.
First, the probability state A is assumed to shift to a CZ low probability state when the main control device 10 is reset (including when the setting is changed), and according to the result of the promotion lottery in the game during this CZ low probability state A transition involving probability state A will be made.

As shown in FIG. 15, in a game (at the start of the game) in which the probability state A is a CZ low probability state, a promotion lottery for the probability state A is performed, but when this promotion lottery is won (timing t1), From the next game, the probability state A will shift from the CZ low probability state to the CZ high probability state (timing t2).
Therefore, by transitioning from the CZ low probability state to the CZ high probability state, the transition probability of the CZ state itself is changed from a low state to a high state.

In addition, in the game (at the start of the game) in which the probability state A is the CZ high probability state, a demotion lottery for the probability state A is performed, and when this demotion lottery is won (timing t4), the probability state A is selected from the next game. will shift from the CZ high probability state to the CZ low probability state (timing t5).
Therefore, by transitioning from the CZ high probability state to the CZ low probability state, the transition probability of the CZ state itself is changed from a high state to a low state.
The details of the promotion lottery and the demotion lottery regarding the probability state A will be described later.

In addition, the main controller 10 performs control related to the transition of the probability state B separately from the probability state A, and performs switching control between the second CZ low probability state and the second CZ high probability state at a predetermined time. I have to.

In the second embodiment, the probability state B is assumed to shift from the probability state B in the normal game state to the second CZ low probability state when the main control device 10 is reset (including when the setting is changed). , When a predetermined number of games (for example, 100 times) are executed in the second CZ low probability state, the second CZ low probability state transitions to the second CZ high probability state, and then a predetermined number of games in the second CZ high probability state ( For example, when the game is executed 30 times), the second CZ high-probability state transitions to the second CZ low-probability state, and after that, the switching control of the probability state B is basically performed at the same time. It's becoming
Although the details will be described later, the duration of the second CZ high-probability state may be extended based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

Therefore, as shown in the figure, when a predetermined number of games (for example, 100 times) are executed in the second CZ low probability state and the number of promotion games to the second CZ high probability state is reached, the probability state B is changed from the game. It will shift from the second CZ low probability state to the second CZ high probability state (timing t3).

Further, when a predetermined number of games (for example, 30 times) are executed in the second CZ high-probability state and the number of games to be demoted to the second CZ low-probability state is reached, the probability state B is changed from the game to the second CZ high-probability state. to the second CZ low probability state (timing t6).
It should be noted that the switching timing of each probability state may be at the start of the game that triggers the switching, or at the end of the game.

Probability state B does not affect the transition lottery for the CZ state itself, but changes the probability of transition to the second CZ state if the lottery for transition to the CZ state itself is won at that time. If you win the transition lottery of the CZ state itself in the 2CZ low probability state, the probability of transition to the 2nd CZ state is relatively low, and if you win the transition lottery of the CZ state itself in the 2nd CZ high probability state , the transition probability to the second CZ state is relatively high.

In addition, since the main controller 10 concurrently manages the probability state A and the probability state B as the probability state related to the CZ state during the normal game state, various Combinations of probabilistic states are formed.
For example, in the game between timing t2 and timing t3 shown, the probability state A becomes the CZ high probability state, and the probability state B becomes the second CZ low probability state, so only the transition probability of the CZ state itself is the high probability state. will be controlled by
Therefore, during this period, it is easy to shift to the CZ state itself, but even if it shifts to the CZ state itself, it becomes difficult to shift to the second CZ state.

Also, in the game between timing t3 and timing t5 shown, the probability state A becomes the CZ high certainty state, and the probability state B becomes the second CZ high certainty state CZ overlapping high certainty state, so the CZ state itself is controlled in a high-probability state, and the transition probability in the second CZ state is also controlled in a high-probability state.
Therefore, during this period, it is easy to shift to the CZ state itself, and when it shifts to the CZ state itself, it is easy to shift to the second CZ state.

Also, in the game between timing t5 and timing t6 shown in the figure, the probability state A becomes the CZ low probability state, and the probability state B becomes the second CZ high probability state, so only the transition probability of the second CZ state is the high probability state. will be controlled by
Therefore, during this period, it is difficult to shift to the CZ state itself, but when it shifts to the CZ state itself, it becomes easy to shift to the second CZ state.

As described above, by the control of the main control device 10, the probability state A in the normal game state is changed to the CZ high certainty state, triggered by the winning of a predetermined combination in the CZ low certainty state in the normal game state. becomes.
That is, the main control device 10 as a game control means, based on the result of the game in the first game state (normal game state), high probability first game state ( It is provided with a probability control means capable of controlling the CZ high probability state).
Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's expectation for the occurrence of the CZ state itself.

Further, by the main control device 10, in the second CZ low probability state in the normal gaming state, when the number of games executed reaches the number of promotion games (for example, 100 games) to the second CZ high probability state, a predetermined period (For example, during 30 games) The probability state B in the normal game state is changed to the second CZ high probability state.
That is, the main controller 10 controls the specific first game state (first 2CZ high probability state) is provided with controllable game control means.
Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's expectation for the occurrence of the second CZ state.

In addition, the main control device 10 as a game control means, based on the number of game executions in the first game state (normal game state) has reached a predetermined number, specific first game state (second CZ high probability state) control is possible.
Therefore, the second CZ high probability state occurs according to the progress of the game, and it is possible to realize a highly interesting game in which the player's sense of expectation gradually increases according to the progress of the game. .
In addition, even when the privilege is not obtained even if the game is executed a plurality of times, the second CZ high probability state occurs when the game is executed a predetermined number of times, so that the player's willingness to play is improved. It becomes possible to let

In addition, since the main controller 10 manages and controls the probabilistic state A and the probabilistic state B separately, the transition probability of the CZ state itself and the transition probability (selection probability) of the first CZ state and the second CZ state change variously. As a result, the contents of the game related to the transition of the CZ state are diversified, and the interest of the game can be improved.
In addition, various combinations of probability states are generated, and the contents of the game related to the transition to the CZ state can be diversified.
In addition, it is possible to generate a CZ overlapping high probability state in which both probability states are high probability states, and it is possible to greatly improve the player's sense of expectation.

In the second embodiment, when the game is executed 100 times in the second CZ low probability state, the state is shifted to the second CZ high probability state, and when the game is executed 30 times in the second CZ high probability state However, the number of games to be shifted to each probability state may be other than the above.
Also, the trigger for changing the probability state B may be other than the above. The number of winnings of a predetermined combination is counted, and when the counted result reaches a predetermined number, each probability state related to the probability state B is changed. You may do so.
As described above, the transition of the probability state corresponding to the transition of the CZ state is performed in the gaming machine of the second embodiment.

[Various Lottery Concerning CZ State in Gaming Machine of Second Embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 16 to 18, various lotteries relating to the CZ state in the gaming machine of the second embodiment will be described.

First, with reference to FIG. 16, the promotion probability to the CZ high probability state and the demotion probability to the CZ low probability state related to the probability state A will be described.
As described above, the probability state A is managed by the main controller 10, and the transition (or maintenance) of the CZ low-probability state and the CZ high-probability state is controlled.
In the second embodiment, based on the lottery result of the combination in the normal game state in the main control device 10, the transition lottery (promotion lottery) from the CZ low probability state to the CZ high probability state, and from the CZ high probability state to CZ The probability state A is managed by performing a lottery (demotion lottery) for transition to the low-probability state.

FIG. 16 shows the transition probabilities to each probability state based on the lottery result of the combination realized by the control of the main controller 10 .
First, FIG. 16(a) shows the promotion probability (winning probability) to the CZ high probability state in the transition lottery when each combination is won in the CZ low probability state during the normal game state.
As shown in FIG. 16(a), when winning a weak cherry role, no promotion to CZ high certainty state (maintenance of CZ low certainty state) is determined with a probability of 70%, and a probability of 30% A transition lottery is performed so that it is determined to be promoted to the CZ high probability state.

Similarly, when a combination (including loss) other than the weak cherry combination is won, no promotion to the CZ high-certainty state (maintenance of the CZ low-certainty state) is determined with a probability of 100%. That is, in the lottery results other than the weak cherry combination, the transition lottery is performed so as not to be promoted to the CZ high probability state.

Next, FIG. 16(b) shows the demotion probability (winning probability) to the CZ low probability state in the transition lottery when each combination is won in the CZ high probability state during the normal game state.
As shown in FIG. 16(b), when the push order bell role is won, no demotion to the CZ low probability state (maintenance of the CZ high probability state) is determined with a probability of 95%, and a probability of 5% A transition lottery is performed so that it is decided to demote to the CZ Low Probability state at .

Similarly, when winning a combination (including loss) other than the push-order bell combination, no demotion to the CZ low-probability state (maintenance of the CZ high-probability state) is determined with a probability of 100%. That is, in the lottery result other than the push order bell combination, a transition lottery is performed so as not to demote to the CZ low probability state.

As described above, the promotion lottery and demotion lottery related to the probability state A are performed with a predetermined probability according to the lottery result of the combination during the normal game state, so it is possible to reliably manage the probability state A. It becomes.
In addition, when the game is executed, the player will pay attention to the provision of privileges such as a pseudo-bonus state, etc., and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.
In addition, when winning the chance role in the promotion lottery, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation.

Incidentally, the promotion lottery trigger role and the demotion lottery trigger role may be other than the above, and each trigger role may be set to a plurality of types of roles.
Also, the promotion probability and demotion probability at the time of winning each combination may be probabilities other than the above.

Next, the winning probability of the CZ state itself and the winning probability of the second CZ state will be described with reference to FIG.

As described above, in the main controller 10, in the game during the normal game state, the transition lottery for the CZ state itself (step S3 in FIG. 14) is performed. It will shift from the normal game state as the first game state to the CZ state as the second game state (giving the shift right).
In addition, when the CZ state itself transition lottery is won, a second CZ state transition lottery (step S5 in FIG. 14) is performed, and when this transition lottery is won, the transitioned CZ state is the specific second state. Control is performed in the second CZ state as the game state, and when the shift lottery is not won, the shifted CZ state is controlled in the first CZ state as the normal second game state.
Further, as described above, the lottery for the transition to the CZ state itself is executed based on the probability state A, and the lottery for the transition to the second CZ state is executed based on the probability state B.

First, FIG. 17(a) shows the winning probability in the transition lottery of the CZ state itself according to the lottery result of the combination in the normal game state realized by the control of the main controller 10. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 17(a), the probability state A in the normal game state is in the CZ low probability state, and if the weak watermelon role is won, there is a probability of 90% that the CZ state will not be won, and the probability of 10%. A transition lottery is performed so as to win the CZ state with probability.
Similarly, when the probability state A is in the CZ high probability state, if a weak watermelon role is won, there is a 70% probability that the CZ state will not be elected, and a 30% probability that the CZ state will be elected. is done.

In addition, when the probability state A in the normal game state is the CZ low probability state, if a role other than a weak watermelon role is won, the CZ state is not won with a probability of 100%, and the CZ state is always not won. A migration lottery will be held as follows.
Similarly, when the probability state A is in the CZ high probability state, if a role other than a weak watermelon role is won, there is a 90% probability that the CZ state will not be won, and a 10% probability that the CZ state will be won. A transfer lottery will be held in

As described above, the transition lottery for the CZ state itself is mainly triggered by winning a weak watermelon role, and the probability of winning the CZ state itself is higher in the CZ high-certainty state than in the CZ low-certainty state. It will happen.
Therefore, based on the probability state A, it is possible to reliably change the winning probability of the CZ state itself.
In addition, when winning the weak watermelon role regardless of the state of the probability state A, it is possible to improve the expectation of the player, and when winning the weak watermelon role in the CZ high probability state, It is possible to further improve the player's sense of expectation.

Also, during the CZ high probability state, there is a possibility of winning the CZ state itself even when a combination other than the weak watermelon combination is won.
Therefore, it is possible to greatly improve the player's expectation in the CZ high probability state.
It should be noted that the trigger combination for the transition lottery for the CZ state itself may be other than the above, and a plurality of types of combinations may be set as the trigger combination.
Further, each winning probability at the time of winning the trigger role of the transition lottery of the CZ state itself may be other than the above.

Next, FIG. 17(b) shows the winning probability in the second CZ state transition lottery when the CZ state is won.
As shown in FIG. 17(b), the probability state B is the second CZ low probability state, and if the CZ state is elected, the second CZ state is not elected with a probability of 80%, and the second CZ with a probability of 20%. A transition lottery is performed so as to win the state.

Similarly, when the probability state B is the second CZ high probability state, if the CZ state is elected, there is a 50% probability that the CZ state will not be elected, and the CZ state will be elected with a 50% probability. is done.
As a result of the transition lottery, when the second CZ state is won, the state is shifted to the second CZ state, and when the second CZ state is not won, the state is shifted to the first CZ state.

As described above, when the probability state B when winning the CZ state transition lottery is the second CZ high probability state, the main controller 10 is higher than the second CZ low probability state. Lottery control is performed so that the probability of shifting to the 2CZ state increases.
That is, the main control device 10 as a game control means, in the specific first game state (second CZ high probability state), than the first game state (for example, second CZ low probability state) other than the specific first game state It is possible to execute control for increasing the probability of occurrence of the specific second game state.

Therefore, based on the probability state B, it is possible to reliably change the probability of transition to the second CZ state.
Further, when winning the CZ state itself in the second CZ high probability state, it is possible to further improve the player's sense of expectation.
In addition, the winning probability of the transition lottery of the second CZ state may be other than the above as long as the second CZ high probability state is higher than the second CZ low probability state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the lottery for adding the number of games to the number of continuous games in the second CZ high-probability state will be described.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the probability state B in the normal game state is assumed to shift to the second CZ low probability state when the main control device 10 is reset (including when the setting is changed). , When a predetermined number of games are executed in the second CZ low probability state in the normal game state, the second CZ low probability state is shifted to the second CZ high probability state, and then a predetermined number of games are played in the second CZ high probability state. is executed, the second CZ high-probability state transitions to the second CZ low-probability state, and after that, the switching control of the probability state B is basically performed at the same time.

The number of continuous games in the second CZ high probability state is set to the number of basic games (for example, 30 games) in the initial state, and when this basic game number is executed during the second CZ high probability state, the second CZ Although the high-certainty state ends, in the game in the second CZ low-certainty state before shifting to the second CZ high-certainty state, a predetermined number of games is added to the basic game number in the second CZ high-certainty state after that (addition ) is performed, and when this extra lottery is won, a predetermined number of games is added (added) to the number of basic games, and the number of continuous games in the second CZ high probability state is preliminarily. It will be updated by addition.
Therefore, the second CZ low certainty state and the second CZ high certainty state alternately repeat the transition during the normal game state, but in each second CZ low certainty state, the duration of the second CZ high certainty state immediately after that An additional lottery (extended lottery) will be held.

Further, the additional lottery is continuously executed during the second CZ low probability state, and each time the additional lottery is won, the number of continuous games in the second CZ high probability state is added and updated in advance.
Therefore, the number of games to be continued in the second CZ high-certainty state is undefined, and the number of games extended until the transition to the second CZ high-certainty state is undefined. The actual number of continuous games changes accordingly.

FIG. 18 is the result of the additional lottery (extended lottery) in the game during the second CZ low probability state realized by the control of the main control device 10, and the number of games for the number of continuous games in the second CZ high probability state immediately after It shows the additional probability (winning probability).
It should be noted that the additional lottery is executed when a rare combination is won in the game during the second CZ low probability state.

As shown in FIG. 18, when winning a weak rare role in the game in the second CZ low probability state in the normal game state, 0 games are added with a probability of 85% (no addition), 10% An extra lottery is performed such that 5 games are added with a probability of 5% and 10 games are added with a probability of 5%.
Also, if you win a strong rare role in the game in the second CZ low probability state, 0 games are added with a probability of 50% (no addition), 5 games are added with a probability of 40%, 10 An additional lottery (extended lottery) is conducted in which 10 games are added with a probability of 10%.

As a result of the addition lottery, the determined number of games is added (added) to the number of continuous games in the second CZ high-probability state immediately after that. In addition, the number of continuous games is added for each additional lottery, and the duration of the second CZ high-probability state is extended accordingly.
In addition, when the weak watermelon role is won during the normal game state, the transition lottery for the CZ state itself is also performed separately from the above-mentioned additional lottery, and when the transition lottery for the CZ state itself is won, the above-mentioned additional lottery is performed. result is invalid.

As described above, the main control device 10, in the game during the second CZ low probability state in the normal gaming state before shifting to the second CZ high probability state, the additional lottery for the number of continuous games in the second CZ high probability state immediately after that is executed in advance, and when winning the extra lottery, the number of games to be continued in the second CZ high-probability state is extended by the number of games added.
That is, the main control device 10 as a game control means, before the specific first game state (second CZ high probability state) occurs, the extended lottery (additional lottery) that can extend the duration of the specific first game state An executable extended lottery control means is provided.

Therefore, the number of continuous games in the second CZ high-probability state changes variously, and it is possible to execute highly interesting games that change the player's sense of expectation.
Further, when the duration of the second CZ high-probability state is extended by the additional lottery, it is possible to improve the player's expectation.
Also, the extension of the duration of the second CZ high certainty state is determined in the game during the previous second CZ low certainty state, so the second CZ low certainty state before the transition to the second CZ high certainty state From that point on, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation and the interest in the game.
The number of games added to the number of games in the 2nd CZ high probability state may be added to the number of games. It's okay.
As described above, various types of lottery relating to the CZ state are performed in the gaming machine of the second embodiment.

[Various productions related to the CZ state in the gaming machine of the second embodiment]
Next, various effects related to the CZ state in the gaming machine of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 22. FIG.
In the second embodiment, the main controller 10 performs various controls related to the CZ state. Then, based on the received control information, various effects are executed by displaying a predetermined effect image related to the CZ state on the main display device 8 .
Further, in response to execution of various effects on the main display 8, the speaker 9 outputs predetermined sound effects, and the lamp 11 outputs predetermined ornamental light.

First, with reference to FIG. 19, an effect image on the main display 8 when an extra lottery for the number of continuous games in the second CZ high probability state is performed in the game during the second CZ low probability state will be described.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the main control device 10, in the game during the second CZ low probability state in the normal gaming state, the additional lottery (extension lottery) for the number of continuous games in the second CZ high probability state However, in the sub control device 20, the main display 8 displays an effect image related to the additional lottery to execute an additional effect for the number of continuous games.

FIG. 19(a) shows an effect image on the main display 8 in a game during a normal game state in which the probability state A is the low CZ probability state and the probability state B is the second CZ low probability state. ing.
As shown in FIG. 19(a), during the normal game state, a normal game state image 30 is displayed on the main portion of the screen of the main display 8 to notify the normal game state.

The normal game state image 30 is composed of an image similar to that of the first embodiment described above, and for example, a moving image of a stage in which the main character advances through a meadow is displayed.
In addition, during the normal game state, as described above, the transition lottery probability of the pseudo-bonus state can be changed, so the probability state of the transition lottery of the pseudo-bonus state is changed from the normal probability state to the high probability state. Then, the background of the stage is changed from the background in the daytime to the background in the evening, and the high probability state is announced.

In addition, in the second embodiment, in addition to notification of the probability states related to the pseudo-bonus state transition lottery, probability states A and probability states B, which are probability states related to various transition lotteries in the CZ state, are also reported. , the normal game state image 30 is changed.

That is, as shown in FIG. 19(a), the probability state A is the CZ low probability state, and the probability state B is the second CZ low probability state. A character A image 30a in which the main character included in the image 30 wears blue clothes is displayed with a predetermined probability.
The color (blue) of the clothes of the character A image 30a informs (suggests) that the probability state A is the CZ low probability state and the probability state B is the second CZ low probability state.

In the above state, when the probability state A shifts to the CZ high-probability state triggered by the winning of a predetermined rare combination, as shown in the figure, a character B image in which the main character wears yellow clothes 30b, it is notified (suggested) that the probability state A is the CZ high probability state and the probability state B is the second CZ low probability state.
However, although details will be described later, when the probability state B is the second CZ low probability state, the probability state A and the color of the main character's clothes do not completely match, and in the CZ low probability state, the main character Image selection control is performed such that the probability that the character's clothes will be blue is high, and the probability that the main character's clothes will be yellow is high in the CZ high probability state.
That is, the color of the main character's clothes suggests the probability state A.

Next, FIG. 19(b) shows an effect image on the main display 8 when winning the lottery for adding the number of continued games in the second CZ high probability state described above from the state shown in FIG. 19(a). ing.
As shown in FIG. 19B, the main display 8 continuously displays the normal game state image 30 including the character A image 30a.

In this state, when the additional lottery for the number of continued games in the second CZ high probability state is won, a specific image corresponding to the number of games to be added by winning the additional lottery appears and is displayed.
In the second embodiment, as the specific image, a firewood image simulating wood used as fuel is displayed in order to be used in an effect during the second CZ high-probability state, which will be described later.

The image of firewood can be changed according to the number of additional games. For example, when five games are added as the number of additional games, a relatively small image of firewood is displayed. When 10 games are added as the number of games to be added, a relatively large firewood image is displayed.
That is, the extended period of the second CZ high probability state is notified in advance by displaying the firewood image.

FIG. 19(b) shows a case where the number of games to be added to 10 games is added in advance as a result of the lottery for adding the number of continuous games in the second CZ high probability state, so the firewood A image 31a is displayed as a large firewood image. It is additionally displayed together with the game state image 30 at the bottom right of the screen of the main display 8 .
That is, in the game during the normal gaming state in which the probability state B is the second CZ low probability state, an additional lottery for the number of continuous games in the second CZ high probability state that is shifted immediately after that is performed in advance. Corresponding to the number of games added by winning, the firewood image appears and displayed, so that the predetermined number of games is added to the number of continuous games before the transition to the second CZ high probability state. It is notified in advance that the duration of the certain state is extended.
In addition, the degree of extension of the duration of the second CZ high-probability state is also reported according to the size of the firewood image that appears and is displayed.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 19(b), when the firewood A image 31a appears and displayed, it is notified in advance that the number of continuous games will be extended by 10 games in the subsequent second CZ high-probability state. It is.
In addition, the firewood image will be continuously displayed until it shifts to a 2nd CZ high probability state.
Further, even when the normal game state image 30 including the character B image 30b is displayed, the appearance display of the firewood image is performed in the same manner.

Next, FIG. 19(c) shows an effect image on the main display 8 when winning the lottery for adding the number of continued games in the second CZ high probability state again from the state shown in FIG. 19(b). 10 shows an effect image when the number of games to be added to 5 games is added in advance as a result of the second addition lottery for the number of continued games in the second CZ high probability state.
As shown in FIG. 19(c), when the number of games to be added is 5 games, the firewood B image 31b is already displayed as a small firewood image at the lower right of the screen of the main display 8. It is additionally displayed together with the game state image 30 on the left side of the firewood A image 31a.

Therefore, when the firewood A image 31a and the firewood B image 31b appear and are displayed, in the subsequent second CZ high-probability state, 10 games and 5 games are added to the number of continuous games, and the number of games is extended by 15 games. is notified in advance.
Also, although not shown, in the game during the second CZ low probability state after that, when winning the lottery for adding the number of continued games in the second CZ high probability state again, the firewood image corresponding to each winning is added. will appear and be displayed.
It is preferable that the number of games to be added to the number of continuous games in the second CZ high probability state and the firewood image corresponding to the number of games to be added are initialized when the game section shifts to the normal section.

As described above, under the control of the main control device 10, in the game during the second CZ low probability state, when winning the lottery (extension lottery) for the number of continued games in the second CZ high probability state, the sub control device 20 By displaying the firewood image corresponding to the winning on the main display 8, the number of continuous games in the second CZ high probability state is extended before the transition to the second CZ high probability state, and the addition The number of games to be played is notified in advance.
That is, the sub control device 20, based on the result of the extension lottery by the main control device 10 as the extension lottery control means, information (firewood image) related to the extension of the duration of the specific first gaming state (second CZ high probability state) is provided before the specific first game state occurs.

Therefore, it is possible to surely improve the expectation of the player from the game in the second CZ low probability state which has not yet shifted to the second CZ high probability state.
Also, depending on the size of the displayed firewood image, it is possible to execute a highly entertaining game that changes the expectations of the player.
In addition, since the player can confirm the appearance display of the firewood image even before the transition to the second CZ high-probability state, the second CZ high-probability state is extended despite the extension of the second CZ high-probability state. Thus, it is possible to prevent situations in which the player ends the game before transitioning to the state, which is disadvantageous to the player.

Also, in the game during the second CZ low probability state, when winning the lottery that adds the number of continuous games in the second CZ high probability state, the firewood image corresponding to each winning is additionally displayed. The number of games is notified in advance each time the number of continuous games in the second CZ high probability state is added.
Therefore, the player can confirm that the number of continuous games in the second CZ high probability state has been extended each time by adding the firewood image, and the player's expectation is gradually improved. Therefore, it becomes possible to execute a high game.
Also, when a plurality of firewood images are displayed, it is possible to greatly improve the player's sense of expectation.

In the second embodiment, the appearance display of the firewood image, the lottery result for the number of continuous games in the second CZ high probability state is notified, but the lottery for the number of continuous games in the second CZ high probability state The manner of notifying the result may be other than the above. For example, the same firewood image may be displayed regardless of the number of games added, or one firewood image may be displayed and the number of games played may be increased. The firewood image may be changed to a larger one each time the firewood image is added.
Also, the numerical information of the number of games to be added may be displayed as it is.
Further, although the firewood image is used to notify the number of additional games, other images may be displayed to notify the number of additional games.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, an effect image on the main display 8 when the number of continuous games in the second CZ high-probability state is extended in the game during the second CZ high-probability state will be described.

As described above, in the second embodiment, main controller 10 determines the probability of transition to the second CZ state in the second CZ high-probability state when the transition to the CZ state is determined at that time. However, the duration of the number of continuous games in the second CZ high-probability state is extended by adding the number of games added during the second CZ low-probability state to the basic game number.
Further, in the sub-controller 20, the main display 8 executes various effects for notifying the second CZ high-accuracy state and extending the duration of the second CZ high-accuracy state.

First, FIG. 20(a) shows an effect image on the main display 8 in the game during the normal game state in which the probability state A is the CZ low probability state and the probability state B is the second CZ high probability state. is shown.
As shown in FIG. 20(a), during the normal game state, a normal game state image 30 is displayed on the main portion of the screen of the main display 8 to notify the normal game state as described above.
In addition, the probability state B may be the second CZ high probability state, and the probability state A may be the CZ high probability state, but this point will be described later.

Further, in the game during the normal game state in which the probability state B is the second CZ high probability state, the character C image 30c in which the main character included in the normal game state image 30 wears red clothes is displayed. becomes.
The color (red) of the clothes of the character C image 30c notifies that the probability state B is the second CZ high probability state.
Note that when the probability state B is the second CZ high-probability state, the character C image 30c is displayed regardless of which state the probability state A is in.

In addition, the firewood image appearing and displayed in the second CZ low probability state is displayed as it is on the main display device 8, and in FIG. Since the figure shows the case where the game is played, in the second CZ high probability state at this time, it is notified that 10 games and 5 games are added to the number of basic games.

Further, at the lower left of the screen of the main display 8, a predetermined image is displayed for notifying that the probability state B at that time is the second CZ high probability state and the duration of the second CZ high probability state.
In the second embodiment, a flame image simulating a flame is displayed as the predetermined image, and the second CZ high probability state and its duration are notified by displaying this flame image.

In addition, the flame image is provided with large, medium and small images of different sizes, the flame image with the maximum size is displayed at the beginning of the second CZ high probability state, and the number of continuous games in the second CZ high probability state is When there are 10 games left, the flame image is changed to a medium flame image, and when the number of continuous games is 5 games, the flame image is changed to the minimum flame image. , the flame image is erased and the end of the second CZ high probability state is notified.
Therefore, since FIG. 20(a) shows the initial state of the transition to the second CZ high-probability state, at the bottom left of the screen of the main display 8 is the maximum size (size corresponding to the number of basic games). A large flame A image 32a is displayed.
Note that the large flame A image 32a is colored orange, and although details will be described later, this coloration changes according to the probability state A at that time.

Then, when the game in the second CZ high probability state is executed and the number of continuous games becomes 5 games, as shown in FIG. It will be done.
That is, the existence or non-existence of the flame image informs whether or not the second CZ high probability state exists, and the size of the flame image informs (suggests) the number of remaining games in which the second CZ high probability state continues.

Also, as shown in FIG. 20(b), when the number of games to be continued is 5 games remaining, if the firewood image is displayed, that is, if there is an additional game number that has not yet been added, , the extended effect with a moving image showing how the firewood B image 31b with the smaller number of additional games among the displayed firewood images is thrown into the small flame A image 32b is executed.

When the extension effect is executed, the flame image is changed from the small flame A image 32b to the medium flame A image 32c, as shown in FIG. 20(c). .
That is, since the firewood B image 31b corresponds to 5 games as the number of additional games, 5 games are added to the remaining number of continuous games (5 games), and the remaining number of continuous games is extended to 10 games. This is notified by the change to the flame A image 32c.
In this way, the flame image is not the number of additional games added from the beginning, but the size of the flame image corresponds to the number of remaining continuous games before the number of additional games is added. Accordingly, the image can be changed from a small flame image to a medium flame image, or from a small flame image to a large flame image.

Although illustration is omitted, when the number of games to be continued becomes 5 again after the game is executed, the firewood A image 31a corresponding to the addition of the remaining 10 games becomes the small flame A image 32b. The extended effect is executed again, and at this time, the flame image is changed from the small flame A image 32b to the large flame A image 32a.
In addition, in the sub control device 20, in order to perform the effect of changing the flame image, the information related to the duration of the second CZ high probability state is added, the number of continuous games before being added, and the number of added games for each additional lottery and the number of continued games after being added are preferably managed separately.
Also, the order in which the firewood image is introduced (the order in which the firewood image is added to the flame image) may be other than the above.

As described above, in the second embodiment, by displaying the character C image 30c and the flame image, it is notified that the second CZ high probability state is in progress.
Therefore, it is possible for the player to surely recognize that the second CZ high-probability state exists, and it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation.
Further, the duration of the second CZ high-probability state (remaining number of continuous games) is notified according to the size of the flame image.
Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind while confirming the duration of the second CZ high probability state.

In addition, when the flame image becomes smaller, an extension effect is executed in which a firewood image corresponding to the extended period of the second CZ high probability state is inserted, so that the second CZ high probability state is extended by adding the number of games. It is reported that it has been done.
That is, the sub control device 20 as notification control means is a first image (flame image ) and the second image (firewood image) capable of notifying the extended period of the specific first game state displayed on the display means, the effect related to the extension of the specific first game state can be executed.
Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the second CZ high-probability state has been extended in a highly interesting manner, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, it is notified in advance that the second CZ high-probability state is extended due to the presence of the firewood image.
Therefore, when the firewood image is present, the player can safely play the game during the second CZ high-probability state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the effect image on the main display 8 when the probability state A is changed in the game in which the probability state B is the second CZ high probability state will be described.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the main controller 10 controls (manages) the probability state A and the probability state B separately. In the state, the probability state A is the CZ low probability state, and the probability state B is the second CZ high probability state and the probability state A is the CZ high probability state.
Further, in the sub-controller 20, when the probability state A is changed in the second CZ high-probability state on the main display 8, various effects for notifying the state are executed.

First, in FIG. 21 (a), the probability state A is a CZ high probability state, and the probability state B is also the second CZ high probability state, that is, the CZ overlap high probability state (timings t3 to t5 in FIG. 15). It shows the effect image on the main display 8 during the normal game state, especially at the initial stage of the second CZ high probability state.

As shown in FIG. 21(a), during the normal game state, a normal game state image 30 is displayed on the main portion of the screen of the main display 8 to notify the normal game state as described above.
At this time, when the probability state B is the second CZ high probability state, the character C image 30c in which the main character included in the normal game state image 30 wears red clothes is displayed.
Also, FIG. 20(a) shows a state in which 10 games and 5 games are added after that, so that the firewood A image 31a and the firewood B image 31b are displayed.

In addition, a flame image is displayed at the bottom left of the screen of the main display 8. When the probability state A is the CZ high probability state (in the case of the CZ overlapping high probability state), this flame image is As illustrated, a large flame B image 32d with blue coloring is displayed.
That is, as for the color scheme of the flame image, when the probability state A at that time is the CZ low probability state, the large flame A image 32a colored in orange is displayed, but in the case of the CZ high probability state , a large flame B image 32d colored in blue is displayed.

As a result, the probability state A is the CZ high-probability state, the transition lottery for the CZ state itself is executed with high probability, and the probability state B is the second CZ high-probability state, and the transition lottery for the second CZ state is highly probable. It is notified that it will be executed.
Even when the size of the flame image changes due to a decrease in the number of continuous games or when an extension effect is executed, the coloration of the flame image is maintained, for example, the coloration of blue from the large flame B image 32d is maintained. The image is changed to a medium flame B image (or a small flame B image).

Next, FIG. 21(b) shows the main display 8 during the normal game state when the probability state B is the second CZ high probability state and the probability state A shifts from the CZ high probability state to the CZ low probability state. Shows a production image.

As shown in FIG. 21B, when the probability state B is the second CZ high probability state and the probability state A shifts from the CZ high probability state to the CZ low probability state, the large blue flame B image that has been displayed until then The color scheme of 32d is changed, and an orange large flame A image 32a is displayed.
As a result, the probability state B is the second CZ high probability state, and the transition lottery for the second CZ state is executed with a high probability, but the probability state A is the CZ low probability state, and the transition lottery for the CZ state itself is normal. It is reported that it will be executed with probability.

As described above, the sub-controller 20 displays the flame image and further, by making the flame image blue, the probability state B is the second CZ high probability state, and the probability state A is the CZ high probability state. It reports that it is.
That is, the sub-control device 20 is controlled to the specific first game state (second CZ high certainty state), and can be notified that it is controlled to the high probability first game state (CZ high certainty state) overlapping notification It has control means.

Therefore, the player can surely recognize that the probability state B is the second CZ high probability state and the probability state A is the CZ high probability state, and the player's expectation can be greatly improved. It becomes.
In addition, by the appearance display of the flame image, it is notified that the probability state B is the second CZ high probability state, and the color scheme (blue) of the flame image that is displayed indicates that the probability state A is the CZ high probability state. Since something is reported, the player can recognize at a glance that both probability states are high probability states, and more efficient and effective reporting is possible.

Further, by changing the color scheme of the flame image, the state change in the probability state A can be notified while the second CZ high probability state is being notified.
Therefore, the state change of the probability state A in the second CZ high-probability state can be notified without any sense of discomfort, and the player can recognize both probability states while concentrating on the game.

Although the state change of the probability state A is notified by the color scheme of the flame image, the state change of the probability state A may be notified by changing the pattern or form of the flame image.
Also, various effects related to the CZ state may be executed on the sub-display 17 or may be executed on both the main display 8 and the sub-display 17 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, control of various effect images according to probability state A and probability state B will be described.
As described above, in the sub-controller 20, based on the control information from the main controller 10, by changing the image of the main character and the flame image in the normal game state image 30 on the main display 8, the probability state A and probability state B are notified.

That is, in the second CZ low probability state, the secondary control device 20 selects the color scheme of the clothes of the main character according to the probability state A with a predetermined probability, thereby notifying the probability state A in the second CZ low probability state ( suggested).
On the other hand, in the second CZ high-probability state, by selecting the coloration of the flame image according to the probability state A with a predetermined probability, the probability state A in the second CZ high-probability state is notified.

FIG. 22 shows the selection rate of each effect image by the sub control device 20, and the probability of maintaining or changing the color scheme of the main character's clothes in the game during the second CZ low probability state and the second CZ high probability Indicates the probability of maintaining or changing the color scheme of the flame image in the game during the state.

First, FIGS. 22(a) and 22(b) show the probability of maintaining or changing the color scheme of the main character's clothes in the game during the second CZ low probability state.

As shown in FIG. 22(a), in the game during the second CZ low probability state in the normal game state, the character A image (for example, the character A image 30a in FIG. 19) showing the blue clothes of the main character is displayed. When the probability state A at that time is the CZ low probability state, it is decided to maintain the character A image with a probability of 95%, and the character B image showing yellow clothes is determined with a probability of 5%. (eg, character B image 30b in FIG. 19).
Similarly, when the probability state A at that time is the CZ high probability state, it is decided to maintain the character A image with a probability of 60%, and it is decided to change to the character B image with a probability of 40%. be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22(b), in the game in the second CZ low probability state in the normal game state, when the character B image is displayed, the probability state A at that time is the CZ low probability state. In this case, it is decided to maintain the character B image with a probability of 30%, and it is decided to change to the character A image with a probability of 70%.
Similarly, when the probability state A at that time is the CZ high probability state, it is decided to maintain the character B image with a probability of 90%, and it is decided to change to the character A image with a probability of 10%. be done.

With the above probability, in the game during the second CZ low probability state, it is determined whether to maintain or change the color scheme of the main character's clothes. , the probability state A at that time is likely to be a CZ low probability state, and if the color of the main character's clothes is yellow, the probability state A at that time is likely to be a CZ high probability state. sexuality increases.
That is, during the second CZ low probability state, the color of the main character's clothes suggests whether the probability state A is the CZ low probability state or the CZ high probability state.

Next, FIGS. 22(c) and 22(d) show probabilities of whether to maintain or change the color scheme of the flame image in the game during the second CZ high probability state.

As shown in FIG. 22(c), in the game during the second CZ high probability state in the normal game state, a flame A image (for example, a large flame A image 32a in FIG. 21) showing an orange coloration of the flame image is displayed. When the probability state A at that time is the CZ low probability state, it is determined to maintain the flame A image with a probability of 100%, and the color scheme is blue with a probability of 0%. It is decided to change to the B image (for example, the large flame B image 32d in FIG. 21).
Similarly, if the probability state A at that time is the CZ high certainty state, that is, the CZ overlapping high certainty state, it is determined to maintain the flame A image with a probability of 0%, and the flame B image with a probability of 100%. It is decided to change to an image.

Further, as shown in FIG. 22(d), in the game in the second CZ high probability state in the normal game state, when the flame B image is displayed, the probability state A at that time is the CZ low probability state. If so, with a probability of 0% it is decided to keep the flame B image, and with a probability of 100% it is decided to change to the flame A image.
Similarly, if the probability state A at that time is the CZ high probability state, that is, the CZ overlapping high probability state, it is determined to maintain the flame B image with a probability of 100%, and the flame A image is determined with a probability of 0%. It is decided to change to an image.

With the above probability, in the game during the second CZ high probability state in the normal game state, it is determined whether to maintain or change the color scheme of the flame image. is determined that the probability state A at that time is a CZ low probability state, and if the flame image is blue, it is determined that the probability state A at that time is a CZ high probability state. Become.

That is, during the second CZ high probability state, the color scheme of the flame image is selected with a probability different from the selection probability of the main character's clothing color scheme during the second CZ low probability state, and as a result, the color scheme of the flame image. Thus, whether the probability state A is the CZ low probability state or the CZ high probability state is definitely notified.
Although illustration is omitted, in the second CZ high-probability state, the main character's clothes are always changed (with a probability of 100%) to an image showing red (for example, the character C image 30c in FIG. 20). becomes.

As described above, since the display control of the image of the main character and the flame image is performed by the sub control device 20, the color scheme (yellow) of the main character's clothes in the second CZ low probability state indicates that the probability state A is CZ high. Although it is not reported with a probability of 100% that it is a certain state, in the color scheme (blue) of the flame image in the second CZ high certainty state, there is a 100% probability that the probability state A is a CZ high certainty state Notification is made in
As a result, in the second CZ low-certainty state, the color of the clothes of the main character suggests whether the probability state A is a CZ low-certainty state or a CZ high-certainty state, whereas the second CZ high-certainty state Inside, whether the probability state A is the CZ low probability state or the CZ high probability state is definitely notified by the coloration of the flame image.

That is, the sub-control device 20, depending on whether it is controlled to the specific first game state, can notify with different probability that it is controlled to the high probability first game state (CZ high certainty state) A notification control means is provided.
Therefore, according to the state of the probability state B, the notification mode related to the state of the probability state A can be changed variously to form a well-defined notification mode, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, during the second CZ low probability state, since it is suggested whether the probability state A is a CZ low probability state or a CZ high probability state, the player can predict the state of the probability state A while enjoying It is possible to play games.
On the other hand, in the second CZ high-probability state, the player's expectation increases, but by accurately informing the state related to the probability state A, the player's expectation can be increased more effectively. It becomes possible. In particular, it is possible to greatly improve the player's expectation in the CZ overlap high probability state.
The change and maintenance probabilities of the image of the main character and the flame image may be other than the above as long as the above-described tendency can be formed.
As described above, various effects related to the CZ state are executed in the gaming machine of the second embodiment.

The slot machine 1 of the second embodiment has been described above. The state changes involved may be performed based on a predetermined winning combination lottery.
In addition, the cycle of shifting to the second CZ high-probability state is repeated from the time of transition to the advantageous section, but when the CZ state, pseudo-bonus state, and AT state occur, each game state ends at the time You may make it repeat from .

In addition, in spite of the number of games added in the second CZ high probability state, if the CZ state is won before the transition to the second CZ high probability state, the number of games added is carried over to the game after the end of the CZ state. may be cleared. Also, if the pseudo-bonus state is won during the CZ state, a privilege may be awarded based on the number of remaining additional games. For example, a predetermined number of games may be added to the initial number of games in the pseudo-bonus state.
Further, when the pseudo-bonus state is won during the second CZ state, a pseudo-bonus state with a higher degree of advantage may be generated than when the pseudo-bonus state is won during the first CZ state.
The slot machine 1 of the second embodiment is configured as described above.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a gaming machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 31. FIG.

The gaming machine (slot machine 1) of the third embodiment differs from the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above only in part of the control related to the progress of the game and part of the content of the effect. Others are the same as those of the first embodiment.
Therefore, in the third embodiment, only the points that are different from the first embodiment will be explained, and the other points are the same as those of the above-described first embodiment, so the explanation will be omitted.

[Freeze game in the gaming machine of the third embodiment]
First, a freeze game in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 25. FIG.
In the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, a freeze game can be executed in a predetermined game under the control of the main controller 10. FIG.
A freeze game is a game that temporarily prohibits (stops) the progress of a game while a predetermined game is being executed. is set.
Then, during the freeze game, it is possible to execute an effect related to the lottery result of the combination or the lottery result of the privilege (pseudo-bonus state, AT state).

Therefore, when the freeze game is executed during execution of the game, even after the start lever 3 is operated and the game is started, even if the player operates the stop button 5, the reels 4 are stopped. Control is invalidated, and the progress of the game during that time is prohibited.

In addition, in the sub-control device 20, by receiving the control information related to the freeze game from the main control device 10, by controlling the main display 8, the sub-display 17, the speaker 9, and the lamp 11 corresponding to the freeze game A freeze effect is executed.
In particular, in the third embodiment, although the details will be described later, when executing the freeze effect on the main display 8, it is possible to execute the effect of notifying a winning combination different from the lottery result of the winning combination at that time. there is

Also in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the sub control device 20 can execute a winning effect based on the lottery result of the winning combination during execution of the game. By executing the performance, the winning combination is notified.
That is, the sub-controller 20 is provided with notification control means capable of executing control for executing a predetermined notification based on the lottery result of the lottery means (main controller 10).

First, with reference to FIG. 23, various state transitions in which a freeze game is executed in a predetermined game will be described.
FIG. 23 shows the transition of the reception state of the input from the stop button 5, the rotation state of the reels 4, and the content of the effect on the main display 8 when the freeze game is executed in the predetermined game.
In the third embodiment, a freeze game is executed in some games when winning a rare combination.

As shown in FIG. 23, when the player starts the game by operating the start lever 3 (start operation) (timing t10), the reels 4 start to rotate (forward rotation).
In addition, when a predetermined time (including a wait time) has passed since the start operation, the reel 4 that has started rotating will shift to steady rotation. The 5 input is activated, allowing reel 4 to stop.

However, when the lottery result of the winning combination at the start of the game is, for example, a strong cherry winning combination and it is determined to execute a freeze game in the game, the stop button 5 is pressed as shown in the figure. is not validated, the invalid state continues, and the freeze game is executed.
Although the details will be described later, the freeze game is continuously executed until a predetermined freeze time elapses, and when the freeze time elapses, the game is shifted to the main game (timing t11).

Therefore, during the period from the start of the game to the elapse of the freeze time (timings t10 to t11), the freeze game is executed in which the progress of the game by the player's operation is prohibited.
That is, the main control device 10 as game control means is provided with a freeze game control means capable of executing a freeze game in which the progress of the game is prohibited for a predetermined period during execution of a predetermined game.

In addition, when the strong cherry role is won by executing the game, the winning effect may be executed as shown in the first embodiment. In response to , an effect of notifying a cherry combination (or notifying a strong cherry combination) is executed, but when a freeze game is executed, the main display 8 during the freeze game A freeze effect is executed in which a role different from the strong cherry role is announced (fake notification).
In addition, when the freeze game is executed, the freeze effect is executed in the same manner as when the normal winning effect is executed, except that the light emission color inside the stop button 5 is not changed to the color (blue) indicating validity. Further, during the freeze game, the rotation of the reels 4 is also performed in the same manner as in the normal game.

Therefore, the player recognizes that the normal winning effect has been executed in the freeze effect, and performs a stop operation aiming at the combination that was faked during the freeze game, but the stop button 5 is performed during the freeze game. is invalidated, the reels 4 are not stopped even if the stop operation is performed, and the rotation of the reels 4 is continued.

FIG. 23 shows a case in which a watermelon combination is notified as a combination different from the strong cherry combination. One of the notification modes is selected.
Further, during the freeze game, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 9, and the lamp 11 is illuminated in a predetermined manner.

Next, when the elapsed time from the start of the freeze game reaches the freeze time, the freeze game ends and shifts to the main game (normal game), and at that time (timing t11), the stop button 5 is input. When activated, reel 4 can be stopped.
In addition, when the game is started, the notification of the watermelon role (fake notification) that has been executed until then ends, and the winning effect corresponding to the winning of the strong cherry role is started. A winning effect for notifying the combination (or strong cherry combination) is executed.

Therefore, the player can check the winning combination notified during the game and perform the stop operation aiming at the corresponding winning combination. is stopped (symbol combination corresponding to the strong cherry combination is stopped), and the winning judgment of the role is performed. role) will be confirmed.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, when the freeze game is executed in the game in which the winning effect is executed based on the lottery result of the combination, a combination different from the winning combination is played during the freeze game. is executed.
That is, the sub control device 20 as the notification control means, in the case of executing the notification corresponding to the lottery result in the lottery means (main control device 10) in the game, when the freeze game is executed, the freeze game During execution, a specific notification control means capable of executing a specific notification (fake notification) different from the lottery result of the lottery means is provided.

Therefore, the execution of the freeze game and the fake notification during that time makes it possible to diversify the game and improve the interest.
Also, the player who is aware that the normal game is being executed can be made to recognize that it is a freeze game at the time when the stop button 5 is operated, thereby giving surprise to the player. Therefore, it becomes possible to execute a highly interesting game.

In the main control device 10, the freeze game is executed in the game in which the rare role is won, but the freeze game may be executed in all the games in which the rare role is won. A freeze game may be executed with a predetermined probability of the game (eg, 50%).
Further, the rare combination that triggers the execution of the freeze game may be all or part of the weak watermelon combination, strong watermelon combination, chance combination, weak cherry combination, and strong cherry combination.
Also, the freeze game may be executed in all or part of the game in which the rare combination set as the winning trigger combination for the privilege (CZ state, pseudo-bonus state, AT state) is won.

In addition, when winning a rare role, it may be determined whether or not to determine a freeze game according to the presence or absence of granting a privilege, for example, when winning a strong cherry role, the pseudo bonus state transition If the lottery is won, the freeze game is executed with a predetermined probability (eg, 60%), and if the pseudo-bonus state transition lottery is not won, a lower probability (eg, 40%). , the freeze game may be executed.
In addition, the execution probability of the freeze game may be changed according to the type of rare combination won, or the freeze game may be executed for a combination other than the rare combination.
Note that the watermelon role and the cherry role may be notified in any manner as long as the player can recognize the winning role, and the weak watermelon role (or weak cherry role) and the strong watermelon role (or strong cherry role) are identified. A possible notification may be made.

Next, referring to FIG. 24, the execution time of the freeze game will be described.
First, in the third embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, a transition lottery for a pseudo-bonus state is performed based on the winning of the strong cherry role, and when the transition lottery is won, the game state is simulated. I'm trying to move to a bonus state.
That is, the main controller 10 is provided with a special game state occurrence determination means capable of deciding whether or not to generate a special game state (pseudo bonus state) advantageous to the player based on the lottery result of the lottery means.

Then, in the game in which the strong cherry role is won, in addition to the lottery for transition to the pseudo-bonus state, a lottery for whether or not to execute the freeze game is also performed, and as a result of this lottery, if the freeze game is executed. , the progress of the game is stopped for a predetermined period of time, but in the main controller 10 of the third embodiment, the freeze time as the predetermined period during which the freeze game is executed is the transition of the pseudo-bonus state at that time. It can be changed according to the result of the lottery.
Therefore, when the freeze game is executed, the duration of the freeze game changes according to the result of the transition lottery for the pseudo-bonus state at that time.

FIG. 24 shows the selection probability of the freeze time when it is decided to execute the freeze game in the game when the strong cherry combination is won.
In the third embodiment, the freeze time is set to either 5 seconds or 10 seconds. We are trying to do a selection lottery.

As shown in FIG. 24, in the event that the pseudo-bonus state transition lottery is not won when the strong cherry hand is won, the freeze time is determined to be 5 seconds with a probability of 80%, and the freeze time is determined with a probability of 20%. A lottery will be held to select a freeze time such that is determined to be 10 seconds.
In addition, when winning the pseudo-bonus state transition lottery at the time of winning the strong cherry role, the freeze time is determined to be 5 seconds with a 50% probability, and the freeze time is determined to be 10 seconds with a 50% probability. Freeze time selection lottery will be held.

The freeze game continues according to the freeze time determined by the selection lottery, during which the progress of the game is prohibited and the freeze effect is executed.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, 5 seconds or 10 seconds are provided as the freeze time in the freeze game, and the freeze time is selected based on the result of the pseudo-bonus state transition lottery. of.
That is, the main control device 10 as a freeze game control means selects the execution time of the freeze game from among a plurality of execution times, enables the execution of the freeze game according to the selected execution time, and generates a special game state. Based on the determination result of the determination means (main controller 10), the execution time of the freeze game can be selected.

Therefore, it becomes possible to execute a plurality of modes of freeze games with different freeze times, and it is possible to execute more versatile and highly interesting freeze games.
In addition, since the execution time of the freeze game changes depending on whether the transition lottery for the pseudo-bonus state is successful or not, a highly entertaining game that changes the player's expectations depending on the execution time of the freeze game is executed. It becomes possible to do.
Also, if the lottery for transition to the pseudo-bonus state is won, the probability that a longer freeze time will be selected is higher than if the lottery is not won.
Therefore, when the freeze game continues for a long time, it is possible to improve the player's expectation for the transition to the pseudo-bonus state.

Note that the freeze time may be other than the above, and three or more freeze times may be provided.
In addition, although the freeze game is executed at a predetermined probability (for example, 50%) in the game in which the strong cherry role is won, the freeze game is always executed in the game in which the strong cherry role is won. good.

In addition, when the strong cherry role is won, if the pseudo-bonus state transition lottery is not won, the freeze game is executed with a first probability (for example, 40%), and the pseudo-bonus state transition lottery is performed. When winning, the freeze game may be executed with a second probability (for example, 60%) higher than the first probability.

Also, a freeze game may be executed in a game in which a role other than a strong cherry role is won. For example, a freeze game may be performed in a game in which a strong watermelon role is won.
Further, when the freeze game is executed in the game in which the strong watermelon role is won, the freeze time may be determined based on the CZ state transition lottery result performed when the strong watermelon role is won, as described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the notification mode during the freeze game will be described.
As described above, when a freeze game is executed in a predetermined game, a freeze effect is executed under the control of the sub-controller 20, and a fake notification different from the winning combination at that time is displayed on the main display 8. However, in the third embodiment, when executing this fake notification, the mode of the fake notification can be changed according to the freeze time at that time.

That is, for the fake notification, a plurality of notification modes are set, and when the freeze game is executed, one of the plurality of notification modes is selected for the fake notification according to the freeze time at that time. By executing this, it is possible to change the mode of fake notification.

FIG. 25 shows the selection probability of the notification mode in the freeze game when the execution of the freeze game and the freeze time are determined based on the winning of the strong cherry combination.
In addition, in the third embodiment, three types of "watermelon role", "chance role", and "watermelon role→chance role" are set as notification modes during the freeze game. By extracting a predetermined random number when determining the freeze time, a selection lottery for the notification mode is performed.

In the table, "watermelon role" indicates the notification of the watermelon role, and "chance role" indicates the notification of the chance role. It shows a pattern of being changed to a role of chance.
That is, in the third embodiment, a notification mode is also set in which a watermelon combination is first announced during a freeze game, and after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, the notification target is changed to notify a chance combination. be.

As shown in FIG. 25, when the freeze time of the freeze game is 5 seconds, a "watermelon role" is determined with a probability of 80%, a "chance role" is determined with a probability of 20%, and 0%. A lottery for selection of the notification mode is carried out so that "watermelon role→chance role" is determined with a probability of .
Further, when the freeze time of the freeze game is 10 seconds, the "watermelon role" is determined with a probability of 30%, the "chance role" is determined with a probability of 60%, and the "watermelon role" is determined with a probability of 10%. A lottery for selection of the notification mode is carried out so that the winning combination→chance winning combination is determined.
The freeze effect is executed according to the notification mode determined by the selection lottery.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, "watermelon role", "chance role", or "watermelon role→chance role" are provided as notification modes in the fake notification during the freeze game. Then, the notification mode is selected based on the result of the lottery for transition to the pseudo-bonus state.
That is, the sub-control device 20 as a specific notification control means is capable of executing specific notification (fake notification) by selecting any notification mode from among a plurality of notification modes, and special game state occurrence determination means Based on the determination result of (main controller 10), it is possible to select the notification mode in the specific notification (fake notification).

Therefore, the fake information changes variously, and it becomes possible to execute a more colorful and interesting freeze game.
In addition, since the fake notification changes depending on whether the pseudo-bonus state transition lottery is successful or not, it is possible to execute highly interesting games that change the player's expectations depending on the type of fake notification. It becomes.

Also, when the freeze time is 10 seconds, the probability of selecting a player other than the "watermelon role"("chancerole" or "watermelon role→chance role") is higher than when the freeze time is 5 seconds.
As described above, when the freeze time is 10 seconds, the probability of winning the pseudo-bonus status transition lottery is higher than when the freeze time is 5 seconds, so the pseudo-bonus status transition lottery is won. When the probability is high, the probability of selecting a role other than "watermelon role" increases.
Therefore, when a role other than the "watermelon" is selected, it is possible to improve the player's expectation for the transition to the pseudo-bonus state.

Furthermore, when the freeze time is 10 seconds, there is a possibility of selecting the "watermelon role→chance role" which is not selected when the freeze time is 5 seconds.
That is, the sub-controller 20 as specific notification control means can select a notification mode in which a predetermined notification mode is switched to a different notification mode as the notification mode in the specific notification (fake notification).
Therefore, it is possible to execute a highly interesting production such that the fake notification changes from the middle, and when the "watermelon role → chance role" is selected, the player's expectation for the transition of the pseudo-bonus state is increased. It can be improved further.

It should be noted that the fake notification may be any as long as the player can recognize the target role, such as an item image corresponding to each role, an image with color scheme corresponding to each role, or an image corresponding to each role. It may be one that displays character information or the like.
Also, although the selection control of the fake notification is performed based on the freeze time in the freeze game, the selection control of the fake notification may be performed based on the presence or absence of the winning of the pseudo-bonus state.
Also, the selection probability of each fake notification may be other than the above.

In addition, although the selection control of the fake notification is performed by the sub control device 20, the selection control is performed by the main control device 10, and the control information specifying the selection result is transmitted to the sub control device 20. , fake notification may be executed.
As described above, the freeze game is executed in the gaming machine of the third embodiment.

[Effect image during freeze game in the gaming machine of the third embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the effect image during the freeze game in the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described.
In the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment, the control of the sub-controller 20 based on the reception of the control information from the main controller 10 makes it possible to execute the freeze effect during the freeze game.

For example, by displaying a predetermined effect image on the main display 8, the freeze effect is executed.
The control information transmitted from the main controller 10 includes at least information instructing the execution of the freeze game, information specifying the freeze time, and information specifying the winning combination at that time, and is a sub-control device. Anything that enables execution of a freeze effect at 20 may be used.

FIG. 26 shows a freeze effect when a strong cherry role is won and a freeze game is executed. The freeze time is determined to be 5 seconds (see FIG. 24), and the fake notification mode is determined to be "watermelon role". (Refer to FIG. 25) shows the effect image on the main display 8 when displayed.
Therefore, when a mode other than "watermelon role" is selected as the mode of fake notification, a fake notification different from that illustrated is performed.

First, as shown in FIG. 26(a), when a game in which a freeze game is executed is started, the progress of the game is prohibited, and a freeze effect is started. , a fake notification image 40a consisting of character information of "Aim for the watermelon!"
That is, since the result of the lottery for the combination in the game at this time is a strong cherry combination, in a normal game, a win effect is executed to notify the winning of a strong cherry combination (or a cherry combination), but a freeze effect is executed. In this case, the fake notification corresponding to the watermelon role (weak watermelon role or strong watermelon role) different from the strong cherry role is performed.

However, the notification mode of the fake notification is performed in almost the same manner as the notification mode of the winning combination during the winning effect when winning the watermelon role (weak watermelon role or strong watermelon role) in a normal game. At the start of the game, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the freeze effect is being performed, so as in the normal game, the player will stop the reels 4 aiming at the role of the watermelon.
It should be noted that during the freeze game, the only difference is that the stop button 5 emits notification light to indicate that the game is disabled.

However, during this period, the progress of the game is prohibited, and the input of the stop button 5 is invalidated. It will continue to rotate.
Therefore, when the reel 4 is stopped, the player becomes aware that the freeze game is being executed.

It should be noted that the period during which the fake notification is performed may be any period during which the freeze game is being executed after the game is started, and the period from when the start operation is performed until the freeze game is finished (see FIG. 23 (timing t10 to t11)), or the fake notification may be performed from the time when the wait time has elapsed (the time when the reel 4 starts rotating) to the end of the freeze game. good.
In addition, as the fake notification image 40a, the effect image corresponding to the watermelon role is displayed. may
Also, although illustration is omitted, a predetermined decorative image is displayed in addition to the fake notification image 40a during the freeze effect.

Then, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), when the freeze time (5 seconds) in the freeze game has passed, the freeze effect (fake notification) ends with the end of the freeze game, and the winning effect by the start of this game is executed, and notification of the winning combination corresponding to the winning of the winning combination in the game is started.
In FIG. 26(b), since it is a game in which the strong cherry hand is won, the main part of the screen of the main display 8 consists of text information "Aim for the cherry!" A winning combination notification image 40b is displayed.
As the winning combination notification image 40b, a performance image corresponding to the cherry combination is displayed. You may make it display selectively.

Further, at the time of switching from the freeze game to the main game, as shown in the figure, along with the start of the display of the winning combination notification image 40b, the fake notification image 40a that has been displayed until then is pushed out of the screen. is displayed to notify the end of the freeze game.

Then, by shifting to the main game, the input of the stop button 5 is validated, the game can be progressed, and the player who confirms the winning combination notification image 40b recognizes the winning combination in the game and wins. In this case, the reel 4 is stopped, aiming at the winning combination.

Although illustration is omitted, when "watermelon role→chance role" is selected as the notification mode of the fake notification, when a predetermined time (5 seconds) elapses after the fake notification image 40a is displayed, When the image is switched to the fake notification image corresponding to the chance combination, and a predetermined time (5 seconds) has elapsed, the image is switched to the winning combination notification image 40b in the same manner as described above.
In this case, when switching from the fake notification image 40a to the fake notification image corresponding to the chance combination, since the same effect as at the time of transition to the main game is performed, display of the fake notification image corresponding to the chance combination The player again recognizes that he has won the chance combination in the game and performs the stop operation of the reels 4 .

As described above, when a freeze game is executed in a predetermined game, a freeze effect is executed on the main display 8, and a fake notification (specific notification) different from the lottery result of the combination in the game is executed. It is done.
Therefore, when a game related to the transition of the game state is executed, an unexpected performance such as a change in the notified combination is executed, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game. .

Further, during the freeze game, since the progress of the game is prohibited, it is impossible to cancel the performance, etc., and it is possible to execute the performance over a sufficient period of time.
In addition, as in a normal game, the player who is performing the stop operation will recognize the execution of the freeze game at that time due to the invalidation of the stop operation, so that the player can be given a certain surprise. Therefore, it becomes possible to execute a novel and highly interesting game.

Although the freeze effect is displayed on the main display 8, it may be displayed on the sub-display 17 as well.
Also, during the freeze game, when the main display 8 is fake notification, by displaying the image of "Aim for the cherry!" You may make it perform the production|presentation (standby production|presentation) which alert|reports something in advance.
In this case, it is preferable to display an image similar to the above (fake display) on the sub display 17 in a part of a normal game that is not a freeze game. It is possible to enhance the feeling.
As described above, the effect image during the freeze game is displayed in the gaming machine of the third embodiment.

[Modification 1 of the third embodiment]
Next, Modification 1 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
In the modification 1 of the third embodiment, only a part of the freeze effect during the freeze game is different from the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment described above, and the others are the same as the slot machine 1 described above. Therefore, only different points will be explained.

In the above-described third embodiment, when the player operates the disabled stop button 5 during the freeze game, the freeze effect (fake notification) is not changed, but a modification of the present third embodiment In Example 1, the freeze effect (fake notification) is changed based on the operation of the stop button 5 during the freeze game.

FIG. 27 shows a freeze effect when a strong cherry role is won and a freeze game is executed in the same manner as described above. 10 shows an effect image on the main display 8 when
Therefore, when a mode other than "watermelon role" is selected as the mode of fake notification, a fake notification different from that illustrated is performed.

First, as shown in FIG. 27( a ), when a game in which a freeze game is executed is started, the progress of the game is prohibited and the freeze effect is started as described above. A fake notification image 40a consisting of character information "Aim for the watermelon!"

Then, before a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) elapses from the start of the freeze game, when the player operates the stop button 5 aiming at the role of watermelon, the fake notification image 40a is displayed as shown in FIG. Along with being erased, a converted image 40c consisting of character information of "converted!" is displayed on the main part of the screen of the main display 8 instead to inform in advance that the notification mode will be converted.
That is, the main controller 10 accepts the input from the stop button 5, invalidates the stop of the reels 4, but validates the effect control, and controls to specify that the input has been made. By transmitting the information to the sub control device 20, the converted image 40c is displayed.

Due to the display of this conversion image 40c, the player who has operated the stop button 5 will notice that the current state is in the frozen game at that time, and the winning combination from the fake notification image 40a that has been displayed until then will be realized. It will be recognized that it will be subsequently converted to an image that informs the
This converted image 40c is continuously displayed until the freeze game ends.

Then, when the main game is started by the end of the freeze game, as shown in FIG. 27(c), the converted image 40c is erased, and as a notification of the winning combination, "Aim for Cherry!" ” is displayed on the main part of the screen of the main display 8 .

On the other hand, in the state where the fake notification image 40a is displayed, when the player operates the stop button 5 after a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) has passed since the start of the freeze game (game start), the converted image 40c is not displayed and the freeze time elapses thereafter, the image is switched from the fake notification image 40a to the winning combination notification image 40b (FIG. 27(a)→(c)).
After that, the effects during the main game are performed in the same manner as described above.

That is, when the stop button 5 is operated within a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) from the start of the freeze game (game start), the conversion image 40c will be displayed. ), the converted image 40c is not displayed if the stop button 5 is operated during the period (1 second) until the freeze time (for example, 5 seconds) is reached.

This is because, when the stop button 5 is operated just before the end of the freeze game, if the converted image 40c is displayed, the converted image 40c is displayed for a moment and immediately switched to the winning combination notification image 40b. This is to prevent the execution of such an unsightly effect for the player.
Therefore, even if the stop button 5 is operated during the period (1 second) from the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) until the freeze time (for example, 5 seconds) is reached, the converted image 40c is not displayed. , the fake notification image 40a is displayed as it is, and after that, when the freezing time elapses, the winning combination notification image 40b is automatically switched and displayed.

As described above, in the first modification of the third embodiment, when the player operates the stop button 5 during the freeze game, the fake notification is terminated and the notification mode is changed in advance. The converted image 40c to be notified is displayed.
That is, the sub control device 20 as specific notification control means makes it possible to terminate the specific notification (fake notification) based on the operation of the operation means (stop button 5).

Therefore, a player who does not recognize that the freeze game is in progress will notice that the freeze game is in progress when the stop button 5 is operated, and it is possible to realize a game with unexpectedness. be.
Moreover, when the stop button 5 is operated, the converted image 40c is displayed to notify in advance that the notification mode will be changed, so the image displayed up to that point does not notify the original winning combination. This makes it possible to make the player more clearly recognize that the reels 4 are not stopped, so that the player who feels uncomfortable due to the non-stopping of the reels 4 can surely recognize that the state at that time is during the freeze game. be.

Further, even if the player does not operate the stop button 5 during the freeze game, the image is automatically switched to the winning combination notification image 40b when the freeze game ends, so the player does not operate the stop button 5. Even in such a case, it is possible to terminate the fake notification without any problem and announce the winning combination.

Further, when the player operates the stop button 5 after a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the freeze game (game start), the fake notification image 40a is displayed without displaying the conversion image 40c. That is, when the operation means (stop button 5) is operated when the predetermined time has passed from the start of the game, the sub control device 20 as the specific notification control means It is possible to prohibit the termination of the specific notification (fake notification).

Therefore, when the stop button 5 is operated just before the end of the freeze game, the conversion image 40c is displayed for a moment, and then immediately switched to the winning combination notification image 40b. It is possible to prevent the performance from being executed.

Although illustration is omitted, when the notification mode is changed during the freeze game (when "watermelon role → chance role" in FIG. 25 is selected), the player first presses the stop button 5 during the freeze game. is changed from the image notifying the watermelon hand to the image notifying the chance hand, and next time the player operates the stop button 5, the image notifying the chance hand is changed to the converted image 40c. Just do it.
As described above, the slot machine 1 of Modification 1 of the third embodiment is realized.

[Modification 2 of the third embodiment]
Next, modification 2 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
In the modification 2 of the third embodiment, only a part of the freeze effect during the freeze game is different from the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment described above, and the others are the same as the slot machine 1 described above. Therefore, only different points will be explained.

In the above-described third embodiment, the notification mode is automatically switched in the freeze effect during the freeze game, but in the second modification of the third embodiment, the button effect is executed during the freeze effect. Thus, the notification mode is switched based on the player's operation.

A button effect as an operation effect is executed in the same manner as in the above-described first embodiment. An operation image consisting of an image simulating an operation button prompting an operation, character information (for example, "PUSH") instructing an operation, etc. is displayed, and then the instructed effect button 2d (or upper effect button 2f) is operated. It is a series of effects for displaying a predetermined image on the main display 8 (or the sub-display 17) when the display is displayed.
That is, the various effect images during the freeze effect are not displayed with the passage of time, but are displayed with the player's operation as a trigger.

FIG. 28 shows a freeze effect when a strong cherry role is won and a freeze game is executed in the same manner as described above. 10 shows an effect image on the main display 8 when
Therefore, when a mode other than "watermelon role" is selected as the mode of fake notification, a fake notification different from that illustrated is performed.

First, as shown in FIG. 28(a), when a game in which a freeze game is executed is started, the progress of the game is prohibited, and at the same time, an operation "PUSH is displayed and an operation image 40d imitating the effect button 2d is displayed, and the button effect is executed.
By displaying the operation image 40d, the effect button 2d is activated (the internal LED emits light in a color indicating the active state), and the player is prompted to operate the effect button 2d.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 2d, as shown in FIG. 28(b), the operation image 40d is erased, and instead, a watermelon role is displayed on the main screen of the main display 8 as a fake notification. A corresponding fake notification image 40a consisting of character information "Aim for watermelon!"

Then, when the freeze time in the freeze game elapses, as shown in FIG. The button effect for the first time is executed.

Then, when the player operates the effect button 2d again, as shown in FIG. 28(d), the converted image 40c is erased, and as a notification of the winning combination, "Aim for Cherry!" ” is displayed on the main part of the screen of the main display 8 .
After that, the effects during the main game are performed in the same manner as described above.

If the player does not operate the effect button 2d when the first button effect is executed, the fake notification image 40a and the winning combination notification image 40b are not displayed until the end of the game, and the first button effect is executed. If the player does not operate the effect button 2d during the second button effect, the fake notification image 40a remains displayed until the end of the game. will not be displayed.

As described above, in the modification 2 of the third embodiment, the button effect is executed during the freeze game, and the fake notification image 40a is displayed when the player operates the effect button 2d.
That is, the sub control device 20 as specific notification control means makes it possible to start specific notification (fake notification) based on the operation of the effect operation means (for example, effect button 2d).
Therefore, the fake notification is executed by the player's own operation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the freeze effect.

Further, the button effect is executed twice during the freeze game, and the winning combination notification image 40b is displayed by the second operation of the effect button 2d by the player.
Therefore, there are opportunities for the player to operate the effect button 2d a plurality of times, and various effect images are changed by the player's own operation, making it possible to further improve the interest of the freeze effect.

Although illustration is omitted, when the notification mode is changed during the freeze game (when "watermelon role→chance role" in FIG. 25 is selected), a button effect is executed at the start of the freeze game, When the player first operates the production button 2d, an image notifying the watermelon role is displayed, and after a predetermined time (5 seconds) has elapsed, the second button production is executed, and the player operates the second button production. When the performance button 2d is operated, an image for notifying a chance combination is displayed, and when a predetermined time (5 seconds) elapses, the third button performance is executed, and the player operates the performance button 2d for the third time. When the winning combination notification image 40b is displayed.
Further, during the freeze effect, a button effect for the operation of the upper effect button 2f may be executed.
As described above, the slot machine 1 of Modification 2 of the third embodiment is realized.

[Modification 3 of the third embodiment]
Next, a modification 3 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. FIG.
In modification 3 of the third embodiment, the control of the reels during the freeze game is different from the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment described above, and the rest is the same as the slot machine 1 described above. Only different points will be explained.

In the slot machine 1 of the third embodiment described above, when the freeze game is executed, even if the stop button 5 is operated, the reels 4 are not stopped and continue to rotate. , In the third modification of the third embodiment, it is possible to execute a pseudo-game that can pseudo-stop the reels 4 during the freeze game.

Pseudo-game refers to an execution mode during a game in which game results (pseudo-game results) are derived a plurality of times in one game. It is possible.
Specifically, in a normal game, the main controller 10 rotates the reels 4 by operating the start lever 3, and stops the spinning reels 4 by operating the stop button 5, thereby completing one game. Although the result is derived, in a game in which a pseudo-game is executed, the reels 4 are pseudo-stopped before the final game result is derived as in a normal game, so that the pseudo-game can be simulated even in the middle of the game. The game result (pseudo game result) is derived in a realistic manner.
In other words, when a pseudo-game is executed, the consumption of medals (bet input) for one game will lead to the results of a plurality of games (including pseudo-game results). .

In addition, the pseudo-game includes an operation pseudo-game that requires player's operation and a notification pseudo-game that does not require player's operation.
The notification pseudo-game, as described above, is a pseudo-game that is executed during the first game in the pseudo-bonus state, the reels 4 are automatically pseudo-stopped, and the pseudo-game that notifies the start of the pseudo-bonus state, etc. is.

On the other hand, in the operation pseudo-game, the reels 4 are rotated by the first operation of the start lever 3, and the rotating reels 4 are pseudo-stopped (temporarily stopped) by the operation of the stop button 5 in the middle of the game to derive a pseudo-game result. It is executed by After the pseudo game result is derived, the start lever 3 is operated again to re-rotate the reels 4, and the main game similar to the normal game is executed.

Further, in the operation pseudo-game, it is possible to derive a plurality of pseudo-game results by pseudo-stopping the reels 4 every time the player performs a plurality of operations during the game.
After the end of the operation pseudo-game, the final game result of stopping (final stop) the spinning reels 4 by the player's final operation of the stop button 5 is derived. I have to.

Therefore, the period from the first operation of the start lever 3 to the actual stop of the reels 4 is regarded as one game, and the pseudo-stop of the reels 4 is performed during this period, thereby completing one game (setting the number of bets for one game ), multiple game results are derived.
However, even if the combination of symbols corresponding to the win of the role is stopped by the result of the operation quasi-game (if quasi-win), medals are not paid out like in a normal game.

In addition, in the modification 3 of the third embodiment, the operation pseudo-game can be executed during the freeze game, and the reel 4 is moved once or twice based on the operation of the stop button 5 by the player during the freeze game. Pseudo stop is possible.

That is, the main controller 10 as game control means can execute a first game (main game) in which a symbol combination formed by a plurality of reels (reels 4a to 4c) is derived based on the end of the game. A game control means, and a second game capable of executing a second game (operation pseudo game) in which a symbol combination formed by a plurality of reels is derived during a freeze game in addition to the derivation of the symbol combination in the first game. and a control means.
Therefore, the progress of the game is prohibited during the freeze game, but the input of the stop button 5 for pseudo-stopping the reels 4 is valid, and the operation of the stop button 5 is allowed while the progress of the game is prohibited. An operation pseudo-game accompanied by a pseudo-stop of the reel 4 by is executed.

In addition, in the third modification of the third embodiment, when the execution of the freeze game is determined in the main control device 10, the number of executions of the operation pseudo-game and the freeze time are determined during the freeze game. there is
Specifically, when the execution of the freeze game is determined by winning the strong cherry role, if the pseudo-bonus state is won, it is decided to execute the operation pseudo-game once at 40% and freeze The time is determined to be 10 seconds, the operation pseudo-game is executed twice with a probability of 60%, and the freeze time is determined to be 20 seconds. When the bonus state is not won, the operation pseudo-game is determined to be executed once at 60%, the freeze time is set to 10 seconds, and the operation pseudo-game is executed twice at a probability of 40%. The freeze time is set to 20 seconds.
Therefore, the higher the number of times the operation pseudo-game is executed, the higher the probability of winning the pseudo-bonus state.

Further, in the modification 3 of the present third embodiment, unlike the above-described third embodiment, the main controller 10 executes selection control of the notification mode in the fake notification.
Then, the main controller 10 transmits to the sub-controller 20 control information specifying the result of selection control of the notification mode in the fake notification, so that the main display 8 executes the fake notification.

In addition, when the main control device 10 determines to execute the operation pseudo-game once, either "watermelon role" or "chance role" is determined as the notification mode in the fake notification. becomes.
At this time, if the pseudo-bonus state is won, it is preferable to increase the probability of selecting the "chance combination" as compared to the case that the player has not won.
In addition, although details will be described later, when it is decided to execute the operation pseudo-game twice, "watermelon role → watermelon role", "watermelon role → chance role", "chance role → watermelon role", "chance Any one of the winning combination →chance winning combination is determined.

Then, the main controller 10 performs stop control of the reels 4 capable of deriving a pseudo stop result in the operation pseudo game in accordance with the determined notification mode of the fake notification.
For example, as shown in the figure, when the "watermelon role" is determined as the fake notification, the symbol combination corresponding to the watermelon role can be pseudo-stopped based on the operation of the stop button 5 by the player during the operation pseudo-game. Stop control is performed.
The combination of symbols at this time may be a weak watermelon role or a strong watermelon role. Alternatively, either the weak watermelon role or the strong watermelon role may be selectively determined based on the winning of the pseudo-bonus state. good.

First, with reference to FIG. 29, various state transitions in which an operation pseudo-game is executed once during a freeze game in a predetermined game will be described.
FIG. 29 shows the transition of the reception state of the input from the stop button 5, the rotation state of the reel 4, and the effect content on the main display 8 when the operation pseudo-game is executed once during the freeze game in the predetermined game. is shown.
It should be noted that, in the third modified example of the third embodiment, the freeze game is executed in some of the games when the rare combination is won, as described above.
Also, FIG. 29 shows a case where the mode of fake notification is determined to be the "watermelon combination" when the strong cherry combination is won and the freeze game is executed.

As shown in FIG. 29, when the player starts the game by operating the start lever 3 (start operation) (timing t13), the reels 4 start to rotate (forward rotation).
At this time, when the execution of the freeze game is determined by the winning of the strong cherry combination, the freeze game in which the progress of the game is prohibited is executed until the freeze time elapses from the start of the game.

Then, in the modification 3 of the present third embodiment, the operation pseudo-game as the second game is executed during the freeze game, and the reels 4 can be pseudo-stopped.
However, although the operation of the stop button 5 is valid for pseudo-stopping the reels 4, it is invalid for actually stopping the reels 4, and the progress of the game remains prohibited.

In addition, when the freeze game is executed, as described above, during the freeze game, the main display 8 will execute a freeze effect in which a combination different from the strong cherry combination is announced (fake notification). , the notification of the role of watermelon is performed.

Therefore, as shown in the figure, during the operation pseudo-game (freeze game), the notification of the watermelon role is performed as a fake notification, and the player who confirmed the notification performs an operation aiming at the symbol corresponding to the watermelon role. Then (timing t14), the symbol combination corresponding to the watermelon combination (weak watermelon combination or strong watermelon combination) is quasi-stopped.
In addition, the pseudo-stop of the reel 4 terminates the watermelon role fake notification.

It should be noted that, even during the operation pseudo-game, the normal withdrawal stop control of the reels 4 is performed, and if the stop operation is not performed at an appropriate timing, the predetermined missing symbol combination will be pseudo-stopped. During the operation pseudo-game, the drawing stop control may be ignored and the symbol combination corresponding to the watermelon role (weak watermelon role or strong watermelon role) may be pseudo-stopped without fail.
Further, the quasi-stopped reels 4 may be moved up and down at a predetermined cycle within a range in which the quasi-stopped symbols do not exceed the effective line.
Further, when the player does not operate the stop button 5 during the operation pseudo-game, the reels 4 are not pseudo-stopped due to the end of the freeze game, and the game is shifted to the main game.

When the player operates the start lever 3 (timing t15) after the reels 4 are pseudo-stopped, the rotation of the reels 4 is restarted and the main game as the first game is started. .
However, even if the rotation of the reel 4 is restarted by operating the start lever 3, the activation of the stop button 5 is not performed until the freeze game ends, and the stop button 5 is operated when the freeze time in the freeze game has passed. This game is started after being activated.
It should be noted that the stop button 5 may be activated when the rotation of the reel 4 is restarted by operating the start lever 3 .

Then, based on the operation of the stop button 5 by the player during the main game, the reels 4 are stopped (final stop) (timing t16), and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped.

In addition, the freeze game is controlled by time management such that it ends when the freeze time elapses, but the player operates the stop button 5 during the operation pseudo game until the reels 4 are pseudo-stopped. may not be terminated.
Therefore, in this case, based on the fact that the pseudo game result is derived by the operation of the stop button 5 during the operation pseudo game, the freeze game ends and shifts to the main game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, various state transitions in which the operation pseudo-game is executed twice during the freeze game in a predetermined game will be described.
FIG. 30 shows the transition of the reception state of the input from the stop button 5, the rotation state of the reel 4, and the effect content on the main display 8 when the operation pseudo-game is executed twice during the freeze game in the predetermined game. is shown.

Further, FIG. 30 shows a case where the mode of fake notification is determined to be "watermelon combination→chance combination" when a strong cherry combination is won and a freeze game is executed.
That is, in the main control device 10, it is determined to execute the operation pseudo-game twice, and as the notification mode in the fake notification, the fake notification of the first operation pseudo-game is "watermelon role", and the second operation simulation A case is shown in which the fake notification of the game is a "chance role".

As shown in FIG. 30, when the game is started by the player's operation of the start lever 3 (start operation) (timing t17), the reels 4 start rotating (forward rotation).
At this time, when the execution of the freeze game is determined by the winning of the strong cherry combination, the freeze game in which the progress of the game is prohibited is executed until the freeze time elapses from the start of the game.

Then, in the modification 3 of the third embodiment, the first operation pseudo-game as the second game is executed during the freeze game, and the reels 4 can be pseudo-stopped.
However, although the operation of the stop button 5 is valid for pseudo-stopping the reels 4, it is invalid for actually stopping the reels 4, and the progress of the game remains prohibited.

In addition, when "watermelon role → chance role" is determined as a fake notification, the symbol combination corresponding to the watermelon role can be pseudo-stopped based on the operation of the stop button 5 by the player during the first operation pseudo-game. stop control is performed.
In addition, when the first operation pseudo-game is executed, the main display 8 executes a freeze effect in which a combination different from the strong cherry combination (fake notification) is executed, and the watermelon combination is announced. done.

Therefore, during the first operation pseudo-game (freeze game), the notification of the watermelon role is performed as a fake notification, and the player who confirmed the notification performs an operation aiming at the symbol corresponding to the watermelon role ( At timing t18), the symbol combination corresponding to the watermelon combination (weak watermelon combination or strong watermelon combination) is quasi-stopped.
In addition, the pseudo-stop of the reel 4 terminates the watermelon role fake notification.

When the player operates the start lever 3 after the first pseudo-stop of the reels 4 (timing t19), the rotation of the reels 4 is restarted and the second game is played. Operation pseudo-game will be executed.
At this time, the rotation of the reels 4 may be started when the start lever 3 is operated, or when the start lever 3 is operated and a predetermined time has passed since the start of the game.

Then, when the "chance combination" is determined as the fake notification in the second operation pseudo-game, based on the operation of the stop button 5 by the player, a stop control capable of pseudo-stopping the symbol combination corresponding to the chance combination is performed. done.
In addition, when the second operation pseudo-game is executed, the main display device 8 executes a freeze effect in which a combination different from the strong cherry combination (fake notification) is executed, and a chance combination is announced. done.

Therefore, during the second operation pseudo-game (freeze game), the notification of the chance combination is performed as a fake notification, and the player who confirmed the notification performs an operation aiming at the symbol corresponding to the chance combination ( At timing t20), the symbol combination corresponding to the chance combination is quasi-stopped.
Further, the pseudo-stop of the reel 4 terminates the fake notification of the chance combination.

When the player operates the start lever 3 after the second pseudo-stop of the reels 4 (timing t21), the rotation of the reels 4 is restarted and the main game as the first game is started. It will start.
However, even if the rotation of the reel 4 is restarted by operating the start lever 3, the activation of the stop button 5 is not performed until the freeze game ends, and the stop button 5 is operated when the freeze time in the freeze game has elapsed. This game is started after being activated.
It should be noted that the stop button 5 may be activated when the rotation of the reel 4 is restarted by operating the start lever 3 .

Then, based on the operation of the stop button 5 by the player during the main game, the reels 4 are stopped (final stop) (timing t22), and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped.
In addition, the operation effective time is set in advance in the first operation pseudo-game, and if the player does not operate the stop button 5 during the operation effective time in the first operation pseudo-game, automatically It will shift to the second operation pseudo-game (fake notification is also changed). Also, when the player does not operate the stop button 5 during the second operation pseudo-game, the freeze game ends and the game automatically shifts to the main game (fake notification also ends).

As described above, in the modification 3 of the third embodiment, the operation pseudo-game is executed during the freeze game, and the symbol combination corresponding to the fake notification role in the freeze game can be pseudo-stopped. 4 stop control is performed.
In other words, the main control device 10 as the second game control means can derive the symbol combination corresponding to the specific notification (fake notification) to the reels 4 .

Therefore, not only is the winning combination different from the winning combination announced, but also the symbol combination corresponding to the fake announcement is derived on the reel 4, thereby improving the player's expectation and making the game more interesting. It can be improved.
In addition, since the reels 4 are pseudo-stopped by the player's own operation, it is possible to execute a more realistic game during the freeze game, and it is possible to further improve the player's sense of expectation. be.

Also, when the operation pseudo-game is executed a plurality of times during the freeze game, the operation pseudo-game is executed a plurality of times in one game.
That is, the main control device 10 as the second game control means makes it possible to execute the second game (operation pseudo-game) a plurality of times in one game.
Therefore, the player can enjoy the game a plurality of times in one game, and it is possible to greatly improve the player's sense of anticipation and interest in the game.

It should be noted that the operation pseudo-game may be executed three times or more during the freeze game.
In addition, the freeze game is controlled by time management such that it ends when the freeze time elapses. The freeze game may not end.
Therefore, in this case, the freeze game ends and shifts to the main game based on the fact that two pseudo game results are derived by operating the stop button 5 during the operation pseudo game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the selection probability of the notification mode of the fake notification in each operation pseudo-game when the operation pseudo-game is executed twice during the freeze game will be described.
In the modification 3 of the third embodiment, as described above, when it is determined to execute the operation pseudo-game twice during the freeze game, by the control of the main controller 10, the notification mode in the fake notification "Watermelon role→Watermelon role", "Watermelon role→Chance role", "Chance role→Watermelon role", and "Chance role→Chance role" are determined.

Then, for example, when “watermelon role→chance role” is determined, in the first operation pseudo-game, the fake notification of the watermelon role is executed on the main display 8, and the watermelon role (weak role) is displayed on the reel 4. The symbol combination corresponding to the watermelon combination or the strong watermelon combination is controlled to be able to be stopped in a simulated manner. A stop control capable of quasi-stopping the symbol combination corresponding to the chance combination is performed.
It should be noted that "watermelon role → watermelon role" and "chance role → chance role" indicate that the fake notification and the pseudo stop control of the reel 4 are performed for the same role in the first and second operation pseudo-games. ing.

FIG. 31 shows the selection probability of the notification mode in each freeze game when it is decided to execute the operation pseudo-game during the freeze game twice based on winning the strong cherry combination.
In addition, in the third modification of the third embodiment, the main control device 10 determines the notification mode in each freeze game, and the main control device 10 extracts a predetermined random number when determining the freeze game By doing so, a lottery for selection of the notification mode is performed.

As shown in FIG. 31, when the pseudo-bonus state is not won, "watermelon role→watermelon role" is decided with a probability of 70%, and "watermelon role→chance role" is decided with a probability of 20%. Then, a lottery selection is carried out in such a notification mode that "chance combination→watermelon combination" is determined with a probability of 10%, and "chance combination→chance combination" is determined with a probability of 0%.
In addition, when the pseudo-bonus state is won, the probability of "watermelon role→watermelon role" is determined with a probability of 40%, the probability of "watermelon role→chance role" is determined with a probability of 30%, and the probability of 20%. , a selection lottery of notification modes is performed such that "chance combination→watermelon combination" is determined, and "chance combination→chance combination" is determined with a probability of 10%.
Freeze effect in each operation pseudo-game will be executed according to the notification mode determined by the selection lottery.

As described above, in the modification 3 of the third embodiment, when the operation pseudo-game is executed twice during the freeze game, as the notification mode in the fake notification in each operation pseudo-game, "watermelon role → Watermelon role", "Watermelon role → Chance role", "Chance role → Watermelon role", and "Chance role → Chance role" are provided, and the notification mode is selected based on the result of the pseudo-bonus state transition lottery. of.
Therefore, the target role of the pseudo-stop changes variously, and it becomes possible to execute a more colorful and interesting freeze game.

In addition, depending on whether or not the pseudo-bonus state is won, the notification mode in the fake notification in each operation pseudo-game changes, so the player's expectation can be changed by the combination of the fake notification and the pseudo-stopping symbol. is possible.
In particular, ``chance role→chance role'' is not selected when the pseudo-bonus state is not won, so when this pattern is selected, the pseudo-bonus state is always shifted, and the player's expectation is greatly improved. It becomes possible.

Note that the probability of selecting each pattern may be other than the above, and the target role of the fake notification may be other than the above.

The slot machine 1 of the third embodiment has been described above. It may be executed according to the presence or absence of the transfer lottery, and during the AT state, it may be executed according to the success or failure of the additional lottery.

Also, the number of times the operation pseudo-game is executed during the freeze game may be three times or more.
Also, during the ending period before reaching the limiter, the freeze game may be prohibited.
Also, when the notification mode during the freeze game (symbolic stop symbol combination in the operation pseudo game) matches the notification mode during the main game, it may be determined that the pseudo-bonus state has been won. In other words, it may be possible to enjoy whether or not the game patterns of both match.
In addition, when the pseudo-bonus state is won, the special symbol combination (7 symbols, etc.) may be pseudo-stopped in the operation pseudo-game.
In addition, although the operation pseudo-game is executed during the freeze game, it is also possible to execute a notification pseudo-game in which the reels 4 are stopped without any operation by the player.
The slot machine 1 of the third embodiment is configured as described above.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a gaming machine according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 41. FIG.

The gaming machine (slot machine 1) of the fourth embodiment differs from the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment only in part of the contents of the control and effects related to the CZ state. It is similar to the embodiment.
Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, only the points that are different from the first embodiment will be explained, and the other points are the same as the above-described first embodiment, so the explanation will be omitted.

[CZ state in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment]
First, the CZ state in the slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. FIG.
In the slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, similarly to the above-described first embodiment, the main controller 10 controls the CZ state based on the winning of a predetermined rare combination (for example, a strong cherry combination) in the normal gaming state. A transition lottery process is performed to shift the game state to the CZ state with a predetermined probability (for example, 10%).

Then, when the game state shifts to the CZ state, the transition lottery for the pseudo-bonus state is more advantageous for the player than during the normal game state.
That is, the main controller 10 is placed in a specific game state in which the probability that the special right (pseudo bonus state transition right) is granted by the special game state right granting means (main controller 10) is increased based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. It has a specific game state control means that can be controlled to (CZ state).
Also, before the transition to the CZ state, various effects are executed in the same manner as described above.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the main controller 10 provides a special replay combination as a combination to be drawn in the game.
That is, the main controller 10 as a lottery means capable of executing a lottery related to the provision of benefits such as a role lottery, a pseudo-bonus state (or CZ state or AT state) transition lottery, etc., executes a special replay role based on the execution of the game. A lottery will also be carried out.
The special replay role is a role that is set as a kind of replay role, like the chance role, and the right to replay the game is granted when the role is won.

Further, in a game in which a special replay combination is won, when the right reel 4c is stopped first (when the reel 4 is stopped by a special operation such as a so-called reverse push or irregular push), "7.7. 7” symbol combination (special symbol combination) stops on the activated line, and the other reels 4 are stopped first, as in the case of winning a normal replay role, “replay, replay, replay”. '' symbol combination is stopped on the activated line.

That is, when the player performs a special operation (reverse press) in a game in which the lottery result of the role is the first lottery result (winning the special replay role), the main controller 10 A game result deriving means for deriving a special result ("7.7.7" symbol combination (special symbol combination)) is provided.
Therefore, when the game is advanced so as to stop the left reel 4a first, even if the special replay combination wins, the player does not notice it.
It is preferable to set the winning probability of the special replay combination to a relatively low probability (for example, 10%).

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the stop control of the reels 4 when winning a normal replay combination other than the special replay combination and the chance combination is also different from the above-described first embodiment. If the symbol combination of "Replay 7 7" is stopped on the activated line (if a special operation is performed), and if the other reels 4 are stopped first, The stop control of the reels 4 is performed so that the symbol combination of "replay, replay, replay" is stopped on the activated line.

In the fourth embodiment, in the game during the CZ state, a pseudo-bonus state transition lottery is performed mainly when a rare combination and a special replay combination are won.
That is, the main controller 10 as a lottery means can grant a special right (a right to transition to a pseudo-bonus state) for generating a pseudo-bonus state as a special game state based on the winning of a rare combination or a special replay combination. A special game state right granting means is provided.

First, referring to FIG. 32, the game state transition when the CZ state occurs will be described.
FIG. 32 shows a case in which a special replay combination and a rare combination are won in a game in the CZ state, but the lottery for transition to the pseudo-bonus state is not won.

As shown in FIG. 32, when the game state shifts from the normal game state to the CZ state (timing t30), in the game during the CZ state, a pseudo-bonus transition lottery that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state is performed. will be
Then, in the game during the CZ state, when the special replay combination is won (timing t31), a pseudo-bonus state transition lottery is performed.
Since FIG. 32 shows the case where the lottery for transition to the pseudo-bonus state is not won, the right to transition to the pseudo-bonus state (special right) is not granted.

In addition, in the game in the CZ state, when a rare combination is won (timing t32), a pseudo-bonus state transition lottery is also performed. 2 shows the case of non-winning, so in this case as well, the right to transition to the pseudo-bonus state (special right) is not granted.

Then, when the number of games executed during the CZ state reaches the prescribed number of games (for example, 10 games) (timing t33), a lottery for ending the CZ state is held in subsequent games. becomes.

The CZ state in the fourth embodiment continues unconditionally (except when transitioning to a pseudo-bonus state) until a specified number of games (for example, 10) are executed. In the game after execution of the game, if the right to transition to the pseudo-bonus state is not granted, the game ends with the winning of a normal replay combination.
Therefore, in the games exceeding the prescribed number, the CZ state continues unless the normal replay combination is won, and during that time, the transfer lottery for the highly advantageous pseudo-bonus state is performed.

Although the details will be described later, when the right to transition to the pseudo-bonus state is granted at the time of winning the rare role, a predetermined premonitory period is set, so the premonition that the right to transition to the pseudo-bonus state is granted In games exceeding the specified number of games during the period, the CZ state will not end even if a normal replay combination is won.

Then, as shown in the figure, when a normal replay combination is won in a game exceeding the specified number of games (timing t34), the conditions for ending the CZ state are established, and the game state changes from the next game to the normal game state. will be transferred.
Incidentally, the specified number of games may be 20 games, 30 games, or the like.
In addition, it is possible to execute the push order navigation when the push order bell role is won in the CZ state. %) may be used to execute push order navigation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the pseudo-bonus state transition lottery in main controller 10 during the CZ state will be described.
FIG. 33 shows the winning probability of the pseudo-bonus state when winning the pseudo-bonus state transition lottery opportunity in the control of the main controller 10 during the CZ state.
Note that the main controller 10 performs a transition lottery for a pseudo-bonus state by extracting a predetermined random number when each transition lottery trigger role is won.

As shown in FIG. 33, if a special replay role is won in a game in the CZ state, there is a probability of 80% that the player will not win, and a pseudo-bonus state transition lottery will be performed so that the player will win with a probability of 20%. will be
In addition, in the game in the CZ state, if a rare role (a strong or weak watermelon role, a strong or weak cherry role, or a chance role) is won, there is a 60% probability that it will not be won, and a 40% probability that it will be won. A state transition lottery is held.

If the special replay combination is won during the CZ state and the lottery for transition to the pseudo-bonus state is also won, the game state is shifted to the pseudo-bonus state from the next game of the game.
On the other hand, although the details will be described later, if the player wins the rare role during the CZ state and also wins the lottery for transition to the pseudo-bonus state, a precursory period is set until the special replay role is won, and this precursory period is set. The game state shifts to the pseudo-bonus state from the next game in which the special replay role is won.

Further, in the main controller 10, when a transition to a pseudo-bonus state occurs due to the winning of a special replay combination, a pseudo-bonus state that continues for 30 games is generated.
On the other hand, when the state shifts to the pseudo-bonus state due to the winning of the rare role, the pseudo-bonus state continuing for 30 games or the pseudo-bonus state continuing for 50 games is selectively generated, although the details will be described later. ing.

In the fourth embodiment, if a combination other than the special replay combination and the rare combination is won in the game during the CZ state, the pseudo-bonus state transition lottery is not performed. Even when a combination other than the special replay combination and the rare combination is won, the pseudo-bonus state transition lottery may be performed. However, when a combination other than the special replay combination and the rare combination is won, it is preferable to lower the probability of winning the transition to the pseudo-bonus state than when the special replay combination and the rare combination are won.

In addition, in the game during the CZ state, the pseudo-bonus state transition lottery triggering hand may be other than the one described above, but includes a hand in which a special combination of symbols stops only when the player performs a reverse push operation. preferably
In addition, the winning probability of the pseudo-bonus state when winning the transition lottery trigger role of each pseudo-bonus state is the above if the probability of shifting to the pseudo-bonus state is higher during the CZ state than during the normal game state. Anything other than
As described above, the CZ state is realized in the slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment.

[Control when a special replay combination is won during the CZ state in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36, in the gaming machine (slot machine 1) of the fourth embodiment, the main controller when winning a special replay combination during the CZ state and shifting to the pseudo-bonus state 10 and display control by the sub-controller 20 will be described.

First, referring to FIG. 34, when a special replay combination is won in the CZ state, and the pseudo-bonus state transition lottery at that time is won, the transition of the game state and the display contents on the main display 8 ( performance) will be explained.
As shown in FIG. 34, when the game state shifts from the normal game state to the CZ state (timing t35), in the game during the CZ state, a pseudo-bonus state transition lottery is performed which is more advantageous to the player than in the normal game state. will be

In addition, during the normal game state, the effects corresponding to the normal game state are executed by the main display 8, the sub-display 17, the lamp 11, and the speaker 9. A corresponding effect is executed by the main display 8, the sub-display 17, the lamp 11, and the speaker 9.

Then, in the game during the CZ state, when the special replay combination is won (timing t36), a lottery for transition to the pseudo-bonus state is performed.
Since FIG. 34 shows the case where the lottery for transition to the pseudo-bonus state is won, the right to transition to the pseudo-bonus state is granted at this time.

In addition, when winning a lottery for transition to a pseudo-bonus state at the time of winning a special replay combination, it is possible to stop the special symbol combination by stopping the reels 4 by a special operation (reverse push) during the game. An instruction effect to prompt is performed on the main display 8 or the like.
As described above, in a game in which a special replay combination is won, if the reel 4 is stopped by a special operation (reverse push), the special symbol combination can be stopped. If so, the special symbol combination ("7.7.7") will stop.

Then, when the next game of the game in which the pseudo-bonus state transition lottery was won starts (timing t37), the gaming state is shifted from the CZ state to the pseudo-bonus state.
Therefore, in this case, before the number of games in the CZ state reaches the specified number of games (timing t38), the CZ state ends and the pseudo-bonus state starts.
Further, when the gaming state shifts to the pseudo-bonus state, the main display 8 or the like executes an effect corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state.

In addition, in the game in which the special replay role is won, even if the special symbol combination ("7, 7, 7") cannot be stopped due to an inappropriate eye-pushing operation, the right to transition to the pseudo-bonus state is not available. Since it has been awarded, it will be shifted to the pseudo-bonus state at the start of the next game (timing t37) of the game in which the lottery for transition to the pseudo-bonus state has been won.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the effect image on the main display 8 when the special replay combination is won in the CZ state and the transition lottery for the pseudo-bonus state at that time is won will be described.
Various effect images on the main display 8 are displayed under control of the sub-controller 20 based on control information from the main controller 10 .

First, as shown in FIG. 35(a), when the game state shifts from the normal game state to the CZ state (timing t35 in FIG. 34), during the CZ state, the main portion of the screen of the main display 8 shows the CZ state A CZ state image 50a is displayed so that the player can recognize that it is.
The CZ state image 50a may be any image as long as the player can recognize that the player is in the CZ state, and may be a still image or moving image including a predetermined character, background, or the like.

Also, in the upper right portion of the screen of the main display 8, a CZ state game number image 51 is displayed to notify the remaining number of games with respect to the prescribed number of games during the CZ state.
The CZ state game number image 51 is an image including numerical information, and is subtracted and updated in accordance with the progress of the game during the CZ state.
Incidentally, when the specified number of games is exceeded, it is preferable to change the CZ state game number image 51 to symbolic information such as "?".

Then, in the game in the CZ state, when the special replay combination is won, a pseudo-bonus state transition lottery is performed, and when this pseudo-bonus state transition lottery is won (timing t36 in FIG. 34), The right to transition to the pseudo-bonus state is granted.

For example, as shown in FIG. 35(b), in a game in which the CZ state game number image 51 is "8G", if a special replay role is won and a pseudo-bonus state transition lottery is won, a pseudo The right to move to the bonus state is granted, and the instruction effect is executed during execution of the game.
In the lower part of the CZ state image 50a on the screen of the main display 8, there is text information "Aim for 7" prompting the user to stop the special symbol combination ("7.7.7") as special operation information. A symbol instruction image 52a and an operation instruction image 52b indicating the stop order (stop direction) of the reels 4 are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction.
Therefore, during the execution of the game in which the special replay role is won and the pseudo-bonus transition lottery is won, the reels 4 are stopped by operating the stop button 5 by special operation (reverse press), and the special symbols are displayed. In other words, the main display 8 displays an instruction effect prompting to stop the combination.

Then, when the player performs the stop operation of the reels 4 according to the instruction performance, as shown in FIG. It will happen.
Also, the symbol instruction image 52a and the operation instruction image 52b displayed on the screen of the main display 8 are erased, and instead, a bonus confirmation image consisting of character information "bonus confirmation" for notifying that a pseudo-bonus state is generated. 52c is displayed.

Then, although illustration is omitted, when the next game of the game that won the transition lottery for the pseudo-bonus state is started (timing t37 in FIG. 34), the pseudo-bonus state is started and the main display 8 is in the pseudo-bonus state. will be executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 35(d), in the game in the CZ state, if the special replay role is won but the transition lottery for the pseudo-bonus state at that time is not won, the main display 8 is displayed. Below the CZ state image 50a on the screen, the push order navigation image 22 indicating the push order other than the special operation (reverse push) is displayed.
For example, as shown in the figure, it consists of numerical information "1, 3, 2" prompting the left reel 4a to be stopped first, the right reel 4c to be stopped second, and the middle reel 4b to be stopped third. A push order navigation image 22 is displayed.

Note that the pressing order navigation image 22 at this time may be any pressing order other than the special operation (reverse pressing).
In addition, since the normal player often stops the left reel 4a first to start the game, if the player does not win the lottery for transition to the pseudo-bonus state, the push order navigation image 22 is not displayed ( In other words, no indication information may be notified).

As described above, when the stop button 5 is operated in a pressing order other than the special operation (reverse press) when the special replay combination is won, the symbol combination corresponding to the normal replay combination is stopped. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 35(e), the symbol combination corresponding to the normal replay combination in which the replay symbols 54b are arranged on the activated line of each reel 4 is stopped.

Then, when the conditions for ending the CZ state are not met, although illustration is omitted, the next game after the game in which the special replay combination is won is started, and the effect during the CZ state is continuously executed. Become.
In this case, even if the symbol combination of "7, 7, 7" (special symbol combination) stops due to a special operation being performed in the game, ignoring the push order navigation image 22, a pseudo bonus will occur. Since the state transition right is not granted, there is no transition to the pseudo-bonus state.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, when the right to shift to the pseudo-bonus state is granted in the game in which the special replay combination is won during the CZ state, the symbol on the main display 8 is displayed. An instruction image 52a and an operation instruction image 52b are displayed, and an instruction effect for stopping the "7-7-7" symbol combination (special symbol combination) is executed.
That is, the sub control device 20, in the game in which the lottery result of the lottery means (main control device 10) is the first lottery result (winning the special replay role), the special game state right granting means (main control device 10) Special operation information (symbol instruction image 52a , operation instruction image 52b).

Therefore, if the stop operation is performed according to the displayed symbol instruction image 52a and the operation instruction image 52b, the special symbol combination will be stopped when the pseudo-bonus state starts, so that the player can be assured of the start of the pseudo-bonus state. It is possible to recognize
In addition, since the special symbol combination is stopped by the player's operation to stop the reels 4, a pseudo-bonus state occurs in the same manner as a so-called real bonus, which further enhances the player's understanding. It is possible to give joy.

Further, in a game in which a special replay combination is won during the CZ state, if the right to shift to the pseudo-bonus state is not given, the push order navigation image 22 is displayed so that the special symbol combination does not stop. .
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the special symbol combination from being stopped even though the pseudo-bonus state is not won, and the game can be progressed without any sense of incongruity when the pseudo-bonus state is not won. .

In addition, in a game in which a special replay role is won during the CZ state, when the right to shift to the pseudo-bonus state is granted, the special symbol combination can be stopped by pressing backward as a special operation, but other pressing orders can be used. A special symbol combination may be made stoppable.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the effect image on the main display 8 when the normal replay combination is won in the CZ state will be described.
As described above, in a game in which a special replay combination is won during the CZ state, when the right to shift to the pseudo-bonus state is granted, an instruction effect for stopping the special symbol combination is executed on the main display 8. However, in the slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, in the game within the specified number of games in the CZ state, with a predetermined probability (for example, 50%) when winning the normal replay combination , the same instruction effect as described above is executed.

Therefore, in this case, even if the player stops the reels 4 by a special operation as instructed, the special symbol combination does not stop. It becomes a performance.
As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when a special operation is performed in a game in which a normal replay combination is won, a symbol combination of "replay 7 7" is displayed on the reels 4. It will stop.

FIG. 36 shows an effect image on the main display 8 when the fake instruction effect is executed with a predetermined probability when the normal replay combination is won in the game in the CZ state.
When executing the fake instruction effect, the main controller 10 performs a lottery as to whether or not to execute the fake instruction effect when a normal replay role is won in the game in the CZ state. When it is decided to execute the instruction performance, the main control device 10 transmits control information instructing the execution of the fake instruction performance to the sub-controller 20, and the sub-controller 20 is operated based on the reception of the control information. A fake instruction effect is executed on the main display 8 by the control.
Then, when the normal replay combination is won in the game in the CZ state, the main controller 10 extracts a predetermined random number to perform a lottery as to whether or not to execute the fake instruction effect, and a predetermined probability ( For example, at 50%), the fake instruction effect is executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 36(a), a normal replay combination is won in a predetermined game in the CZ state (for example, a game in which the CZ state game number image 51 is "8G"), and a fake instruction effect is executed. is determined, a special symbol combination ("7.7. A symbol instruction image 52a composed of text information "Aim for 7" prompting the player to stop reels 4, and an operation instruction image 52b indicating the stop order (stop direction) of the reels 4 are displayed side by side.

Then, when the player performs the stop operation of the reels 4 according to the fake instruction effect, as shown in FIG. The symbol combination (“Replay 7 7”) in which 7 symbols 54a are arranged in each of the symbols is stopped.
That is, when the fake instruction effect is executed, even if the player properly performs the stop operation, the special symbol combination is not stopped, and the symbol combinations other than the special symbol combination are stopped. It is reported that the bonus status transition right has not been granted.

However, 7 symbols 54a are stopped on each of the middle reel 4b and the right reel 4c. The player cannot recognize whether or not the special symbol combination will stop until the left reel 4a stops.
Then, although illustration is omitted, when the game next to the game in which the fake instruction effect was executed is started, the effect in the CZ state is continuously executed on the main display 8 .

In addition, when the number of games in the CZ state exceeds the prescribed number of games, the sub control device 20 always executes the fake instruction performance when winning a normal replay combination in the game.
As described above, the CZ state is terminated when a normal replay combination is won in games exceeding the specified number of games.

Therefore, in the final game in which the CZ state ends, the fake instruction effect is always executed, and it is possible to attract the player's sense of expectation until the final game.
However, although the details will be described later, if the right to transition to a pseudo-bonus state is granted by winning a rare role, the CZ state will continue even if you win a normal replay role in a game that exceeds the specified number of games. Therefore, in this case, the CZ state continues even if the fake instruction effect is executed.
Note that after the end of the final game in which the CZ state ends, an effect image notifying that the CZ state will end may be displayed on the main display 8 .

As described above, since the fake instruction effect is executed with a predetermined probability when winning the normal replay role in the game during the CZ state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game during the CZ state. of.
In addition, since the fake instruction effect is executed when a normal replay role with a relatively high probability of winning is won, an instruction effect ( Alternatively, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the fake instruction effect), and it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation.

In addition, when the reels 4 are stopped according to the fake instruction performance, part of the special symbol combination is stopped in the process of stopping each reel 4, so the game ends without the player's expectation. Thus, it becomes possible to execute a highly interesting game that attracts the player until it is played.

It should be noted that the execution probability of the fake instruction effect when the normal replay combination is won in the game in the CZ state may be any.
Further, the lottery as to whether or not to execute the fake instruction effect may be executed in the sub control device 20. - 特許庁
As described above, control is performed when the special replay combination is won during the CZ state in the slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment.

[Control when a rare combination is won in the CZ state in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 37 to 39, in the gaming machine (slot machine 1) of the fourth embodiment, the main controller 10 when shifting to the pseudo-bonus state by winning a rare combination during the CZ state. , and display control (display content) in the sub-controller 20 will be described.

First, referring to FIG. 37, when a rare combination is won in the CZ state and a lottery for transition to the pseudo-bonus state at that time is won, the transition of the game state and the display contents (effect) on the main display 8 are shown. will be explained.
As shown in FIG. 37, when the game state shifts from the normal game state to the CZ state (timing t39), in the game during the CZ state, a pseudo-bonus state transition lottery is performed which is more advantageous to the player than in the normal game state. will be

In addition, during the normal game state, an effect corresponding to the normal game state is executed on the main display 8, etc., but when the game state shifts to the CZ state, an effect corresponding to the CZ state is displayed on the main display 8, etc. will be executed.

Then, in the game during the CZ state, when a rare combination is won (timing t40), a pseudo-bonus state transition lottery is performed.
FIG. 37 shows the case where the pseudo-bonus state transition lottery is won, so the pseudo-bonus state transition right is granted at this time.

In the fourth embodiment, when a rare role is won and the right to transition to the pseudo-bonus state is granted, the precursor period (this precursor period) elapses without transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state from the next game. It is made to shift to a pseudo-bonus state later.
This sign period (timings t40 to t41) continues until the lottery result of the lottery means in the subsequent game wins the special replay combination.
Therefore, if a special replay combination is won in a game that is executed after winning a rare combination and being granted the right to shift to the pseudo-bonus state, the game state is shifted to the pseudo-bonus state from the next game.

Further, during the precursor period (main precursor period), the main display 8 executes the CZ precursor effect (CZ main precursor effect).
Then, when the special replay role is won during the sign period (this sign period), the reels 4 are stopped by special operation (reverse push) during the game, and the special symbol combination is urged to stop. An instruction effect is performed on the main display 8 or the like.
Therefore, in the game in which the special replay combination is won, if the reel 4 is stopped by special operation (reverse push), the special symbol combination can be stopped. , the special symbol combination ("7.7.7") will be stopped.

Then, when the next game of the game in which the special replay role is won during the precursory period (this precursory period) is started (timing t42), the gaming state is shifted from the CZ state to the pseudo-bonus state.
Therefore, in this case, before the number of games in the CZ state reaches the specified number of games (timing t43), the CZ state ends and the pseudo-bonus state starts.
Further, when the gaming state shifts to the pseudo-bonus state, the main display 8 or the like executes an effect corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state.

In addition, in the game in which the special replay combination is won, even if the special symbol combination ("7, 7, 7") cannot be stopped due to an inappropriate eye-pushing operation, the right to transition to the pseudo-bonus state. is provided, the state is shifted to the pseudo-bonus state at the start of the next game (timing t42) of the game in which the pseudo-bonus state transition lottery was won.

In addition, although illustration is omitted, even if a rare role is won but the right to transition to a pseudo-bonus state is not granted, a sign period (fake sign period) is set, and the main display is performed under the control of the sub-controller 20. In the device 8, a CZ precursor effect (CZ fake precursor effect) for displaying the same effect image as when the pseudo-bonus state transition right is granted is executed.
This fake sign period ends when a special replay role or a normal replay role is won in the game during that period.
However, during the fake precursor period, even if you win a special replay role (winning without the right to transition to a pseudo-bonus state), no instruction effect will be performed, and the fake precursor period will be canceled due to the suspension of the symbol combination corresponding to the normal replay role. It will end.

In addition, even though the right to transition to the pseudo-bonus state has been granted, the number of games may exceed the prescribed number of games (timing t43) without winning the special replay role. The period (this sign period) will continue, and in the subsequent game, the winning of the special replay role will shift to a pseudo-bonus state.

In addition, there are cases where the number of games exceeds the specified number of games without winning the special replay role and the normal replay role during the fake precursor period. When winning (timing t44), the CZ state itself ends with the end of the fake precursor period.

In addition, in the game during the fake precursor period, if the right to transition to the pseudo-bonus state is granted by winning a special replay role, the instruction effect is executed in the game, and the transition to the pseudo-bonus state will occur from the next game. In the game during the fake precursor period, if the right to transition to a pseudo-bonus state is granted by winning a rare role, the fake precursor period will be changed to the actual precursor period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the effect image on the main display 8 when winning the rare combination in the CZ state and winning the transition lottery for the pseudo-bonus state at that time will be described.
Various effect images on the main display 8 are displayed under control of the sub-controller 20 based on control information from the main controller 10 .

First, as shown in FIG. 38(a), when the game state shifts from the normal game state to the CZ state (timing t39 in FIG. 37), during the CZ state, the main part of the screen of the main display 8 is displayed during the CZ state. A CZ state image 50a is displayed so that the player can recognize that it is.
Also, in the upper right portion of the screen of the main display 8, a CZ state game count image 51 that informs the number of remaining games in the CZ state is displayed.

Then, as shown in the figure, in the game in the CZ state, if a rare combination, for example, a strong watermelon combination is won, the watermelon symbols 54c line up on the lower right line of the reel 4 and stop.
In addition, a lottery for transition to a pseudo-bonus state is performed by winning a rare role, and when the lottery for transition to a pseudo-bonus state is won (timing t40 in FIG. 37), the right to transition to a pseudo-bonus state is granted. Become.

Then, when a rare role is won, a CZ precursor effect (CZ main precursor effect) is executed by setting a precursor period (main precursor period), and as shown in FIG. is changed to the precursor CZ state image 50b indicating the precursor period.
Note that the precursor CZ state image 50b displayed during the CZ precursor effect may be any as long as the player can recognize that it is different from the CZ state image 50a by changing the background color or the like, but the expectation of the player is increased. It is preferable to display such an image.

Then, as shown in FIG. 38(c), when a special replay role is won in a game (for example, a game in which the CZ state game number image 51 is "5G") during the precursor period (this precursor period) (Fig. At the timing t41) of 37, the right to shift to the pseudo-bonus state is granted, and the instruction effect is executed during the execution of the game.
By executing this instruction effect, "Aim for 7" prompting to stop the special symbol combination ("7.7.7") is displayed as special operation information in the lower part of the precursor CZ state image 50b on the screen of the main display 8. , and an operation instruction image 52b indicating the stop order (stop direction) of the reels 4 are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction.

Therefore, during the execution of the game in which the special replay role is won during the sign period (this sign period), the reels 4 are stopped by operating the stop button 5 by special operation (reverse press), and the special symbol combination is performed. In other words, the main display 8 provides an instruction effect to prompt the user to stop the operation.

Then, when the player performs the stop operation of the reels 4 according to the instruction effect, as shown in FIG. It will happen.
Also, the symbol instruction image 52a and the operation instruction image 52b displayed on the screen of the main display 8 are erased, and instead, a bonus confirmation image consisting of character information "bonus confirmation" for notifying that a pseudo-bonus state is generated. 52c is displayed.

Then, although illustration is omitted, when the next game of the game that won the transition lottery for the pseudo-bonus state is started (timing t42 in FIG. 37), the pseudo-bonus state is started and the main display 8 is in the pseudo-bonus state. will be executed.
In addition, the sign period (main sign period) will continue until the special replay role is won, so even if the CZ state exceeds the specified number of games, the CZ sign effect (CZ main sign effect) will continue to be executed. be done.

In addition, in the games during the sign period (this sign period) (including games exceeding the prescribed number of games), even if a part of the normal replay role is won, the instruction effect (fake instruction effect) is displayed on the main display 8. is executed.
That is, the sub control device 20 sets the main player with a predetermined probability (for example, 60%) when winning a normal replay role in the game (including the game exceeding the specified number of games) during the precursor period (this precursor period). The display 8 executes the fake instruction effect.
However, in this case, even if the reels 4 are stopped as instructed, the special symbol combination is not stopped, so the transition to the pseudo-bonus state is not performed, and the precursor period (main precursor period) continues thereafter. It will continue.

That is, in the game during the sign period (this sign period), even when the normal replay combination is won, the same instruction effect as when the special replay combination is won is executed.
In addition, in the game during the sign period (this sign period), if the normal replay combination is won, the command effect may be executed without fail (with a probability of 100%).
Further, when the number of games during the precursor period (this precursor period) exceeds the prescribed number of games, the command effect may not be executed when the normal replay combination is won.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 38(e), in the game in the CZ state, even if the player wins the rare role but does not win the lottery for transition to the pseudo-bonus state at that time, the precursor period (fake precursor period) ), a CZ precursor effect (CZ fake precursor effect) is executed, and similarly to the above, the CZ state image 50a on the main display 8 is changed to a precursor CZ state image 50b indicating the precursor period.

Then, as shown in FIG. 38(f), in the game during the precursory period (fake precursory period), when a special replay combination that does not grant the right to transition to the pseudo-bonus state is won, the main display 8 A push order navigation image 22 indicating a push order other than the special operation (reverse push) is displayed below the CZ state image 50a on the screen of .
For example, as shown in the figure, it consists of numerical information "1, 3, 2" prompting the left reel 4a to be stopped first, the right reel 4c to be stopped second, and the middle reel 4b to be stopped third. A push order navigation image 22 is displayed.

It should be noted that if the right to transition to the pseudo-bonus state is granted when the special replay combination is won at this time, the symbol instruction image 52a and the operation instruction image 52b are displayed instead of the push-order navigation image 22, and the special symbol combination is performed. An instruction effect for stopping is executed.

When the stop button 5 is operated in a pressing order other than the special operation (reverse pressing), the symbol combination corresponding to the normal replay combination is stopped, as shown in FIG. 38(g). Thus, the symbol combination corresponding to the normal replay combination in which the replay symbols 54b are arranged on the activated line of each reel 4 is stopped.

Then, when the end condition of the CZ state is not established, although illustration is omitted, the precursor CZ state image 50b is changed to the CZ state image 50a by the start of the next game of the game in which the special replay role was won. After the fake sign period ends, the effect during the CZ state is continuously executed.
In this case, even if the symbol combination of "7, 7, 7" (special symbol combination) stops due to a special operation being performed in the game, ignoring the push order navigation image 22, a pseudo bonus will occur. Since the state transition right is not granted, there is no transition to the pseudo-bonus state.

Also, if the winning of the special replay role during the fake precursor period is established in games exceeding the prescribed number of games, the winning of the special replay role ends the CZ state. , the effect image will be changed to the effect image during the normal game state.

Also, although not shown, in the game during the fake precursor period, when a normal replay combination is won, the main display 8 executes an instruction effect (fake instruction effect).
However, in this case, even if the reels 4 are stopped as instructed, the special symbol combination is not stopped, so the transition to the pseudo-bonus state is not performed. is over, the precursor CZ state image 50b is changed to the CZ state image 50a by the start of the next game, the fake precursor period ends, and the normal presentation in the CZ state is resumed.

In addition, as described above, even if the normal replay role is won during this sign period, the fake instruction performance will be executed. It becomes clear whether is the real precursor period or the fake precursor period.
It should be noted that the fake precursor period may be terminated at a predetermined probability when winning the normal replay role. Since the player cannot recognize whether it is the precursor period or the fake precursor period, it is possible to extend the player's sense of expectation.

In addition, even when the winning of the normal replay combination during the fake precursor period is established in games exceeding the prescribed number of games, the instruction effect (fake instruction effect) is executed on the main display 8. - 特許庁
In this case, the fake sign period and the CZ state itself are terminated by winning the normal replay combination, so the special symbol combination is not stopped and the fake sign period and the CZ state are terminated by the start of the next game. It ends and returns to the production during the normal game state.

That is, if the instruction effect (including fake instruction effect) is executed during the sign period, it may transition to the pseudo bonus state (in the case of this sign period), or it may remain as it is without transitioning to the pseudo bonus state. The sign period may continue (in the case of the real sign period), and furthermore, the sign period may end (in the case of the fake sign period).

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, in the game in the CZ state, even if a rare role is won in addition to winning a special replay role, a lottery for transition to the pseudo-bonus state is performed. If the lottery is won, the right to shift to the pseudo-bonus state is granted.

That is, the main control device 10 as the special game state right granting means determines that the lottery result of the lottery means is the second lottery result (rare role win) different from the first lottery result (special replay role win). A special right (the right to transition to a pseudo-bonus state) can be granted based on the above.
Therefore, the mode of transition to the pseudo-bonus state in the CZ state is diversified, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game and the player's sense of expectation.

In addition, when the right to shift to the pseudo-bonus state is granted due to the winning of a rare combination during the CZ state, the shift to the pseudo-bonus state is waited for a predetermined period without immediately shifting to the pseudo-bonus state, and the subsequent game is played. When the special replay combination is won in , an instruction performance for stopping the special symbol combination that triggers the transition to the pseudo-bonus state is executed, and the pseudo-bonus state can be started.

That is, the sub-controller 20 as a notification control means is a special right (pseudo bonus state transition right) based on the derivation of the second lottery result (rare role winning) from the special game state right granting means (main control device 10) is provided, the notification of the special operation information (symbol instruction image 52a, operation instruction image 52b) can be waited until the lottery result of the lottery means (main controller 10) becomes the first lottery result. be.

Therefore, even when the right to shift to the pseudo-bonus state is granted during the CZ state, it is possible to form a game mode in which the transition to the pseudo-bonus state is not made immediately, and it is possible to further diversify the game during the CZ state. It becomes.

Further, even when the state is shifted to the pseudo-bonus state after waiting, the state is shifted to the pseudo-bonus state by winning the special replay combination and stopping the special symbol combination, so that the game can be shifted to the pseudo-bonus state. It becomes possible to make the person recognize it certainly.
In addition, since the special symbol combination is stopped by the player's operation to stop the reels 4, a pseudo-bonus state occurs in the same manner as a so-called real bonus, which further enhances the player's understanding. It is possible to give joy.

In addition, in the game in the CZ state, when a rare role is won and the right to shift to the pseudo-bonus state is not granted, the sub-control device 20 executes the CZ fake precursor effect for a predetermined period and performs the pseudo-bonus. When the state transition right is granted, the CZ main precursor effect is executed during the main precursor period, which is a waiting period for transition to the pseudo-bonus state.
That is, the sub control device 20, based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means (main control device 10) is the second lottery result (winning the rare role), the precursor effect (CZ genuine precursor effect, CZ fake precursor effect) It is provided with a production control means capable of executing.
Therefore, when a rare combination is won in a game in the CZ state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game and to improve the player's sense of expectation.

In addition, when the right to transition to the pseudo-bonus state is granted by winning a rare role during the CZ state, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state is made to wait until the special replay role is won in the subsequent game. After the right to shift to the bonus state is granted, if the special replay role is not won even though a predetermined number of games (for example, 30 times) have been executed, the player is forced to shift to the pseudo-bonus state. You may do so.
In addition, after the right to transition to the pseudo-bonus state is granted, if the special replay role is not won even after a predetermined number of games (for example, 30 times) have been played, a predetermined privilege (for example, pseudo- The right to extend the period of the bonus state) may be granted.

In addition, if the right to transition to the pseudo-bonus state is granted when winning the rare role during the CZ state, the omen period accompanied by the omen effect will continue until the special replay role is won in the subsequent game. However, this sign period shall continue until a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games) are executed, and if the special replay role is not won during this period, a pseudo bonus will be given based on the end of this sign period. It is also possible to notify that the status transition right has been granted and transition to the pseudo-bonus status.

In this case, if a special replay combination is won during this sign period, the instruction effect is executed in the winning game, and regardless of whether the special symbol combination has stopped, at that time (execution of the above predetermined number of games) It is preferable to notify (transition to the pseudo-bonus state) that the right to transition to the pseudo-bonus state has been granted in (without waiting for).
In addition, even if the right to transition to the pseudo-bonus state is not granted when winning the rare role during the CZ state, the fake sign period (fake The fake precursor period may be terminated when a predetermined number of games are executed by controlling to the precursor effect).

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, a lottery for selecting the number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state during the present sign period will be described.
As described above, in the game in which the rare role is won in the CZ state, the main controller 10 sets the precursor period when the lottery for transition to the pseudo-bonus state is won, and in the game during the precursor period, a special When the replay combination is won, the state is shifted to the pseudo-bonus state, and when the special replay combination is won, the number of games to be continued in the pseudo-bonus state is also determined.

Therefore, in the case of shifting to the pseudo-bonus state due to the winning of a rare combination during the CZ state, the number of games to be continued in the pseudo-bonus state changes.
In addition, when the pseudo-bonus state is entered by winning a special replay role in the CZ state instead of winning the rare role, the number of games to be continued in the pseudo-bonus state is not changed, and only the predetermined number of games (30 games) is played. to be set.

In addition, in the game during this sign period, there is a possibility that you will win the rare role again, but in such a case, the winning probability will be reduced even though the right to transition to the pseudo-bonus state has already been granted. Winning a low rare combination may cause the player to feel dissatisfied.
In order to solve such a problem, in the fourth embodiment, in the game during the omen period, the number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state that is advantageous to the player is selected when the rare role is won again. We are trying to control so that it is easy to be

FIG. 39 shows the probability of winning each number of continuous games determined by a selection lottery for the number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state in the main controller 10, and shows the probability of transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state during this sign period in the CZ state. It shows the selection lottery probability of the number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state.
Note that the main controller 10 performs a selection lottery for the number of continuous games in a pseudo-bonus state by extracting a predetermined random number when each selection lottery opportunity is won.

As shown in FIG. 38, when a rare role is won in a game during this omen period, the number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state is determined to be 30 games with a probability of 50%, and the pseudo-bonus state is determined with a probability of 50%. A selection lottery is conducted to determine the number of continuous games of 50 games.
It should be noted that during this Omen period, it is possible to win the rare role multiple times, but the above lottery will be held for each rare role winning, and if you win 50 games even once, the game will continue at that point. When the number of games is determined to be 50 and 30 games are won, a selection lottery is performed again at the time of a rare combination in subsequent games.

In addition, in the game during this omen period, if a special replay role that triggers the transition to the pseudo-bonus state is won, that is, if the pseudo-bonus state is to be shifted from the next game, 50 games will already be confirmed when the rare role is won. Except for cases where the game is not played, there is a selection lottery that determines the number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state to be 30 games with a probability of 70% and the number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state to be 50 games with a probability of 30%. done.

As described above, when transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state from the present sign period, the number of games to be continued in the pseudo-bonus state varies in various ways, making it possible to improve the amusement of the game.
In addition, when the rare role is won during the CZ state and the main sign period is entered, in the subsequent game during the main sign period, if the rare role is won again, the continuation game of the pseudo-bonus state is performed. Since a number selection lottery is held, if a rare role is won during this omen period, the number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state may increase, and advantageous benefits may be given to the player. sexuality arises.

That is, the main controller 10 is the game after the special right (the right to transition to the pseudo-bonus state) based on the second lottery result (winning the rare role) is granted by the special game state right granting means (main controller 10) , there is provided a privilege lottery means capable of executing a lottery relating to the granting of a specific privilege (50 games as the number of continuous games).
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied even when the rare combination is won again during the present sign period, and it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation.

In addition, every time a rare role is won during this sign period, the number of continuous games is likely to increase.
In particular, in the fourth embodiment, the sign period is not fixed but continues until the special replay role is won. Even if the game is delayed, the possibility of a lottery for selecting the number of continuous games will be increased accordingly, and it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation.

Also, even if the number of games to be continued is not determined to be 50 games when the rare role is won during this omen period, the selection lottery will be held again when the special replay role is won, so the rare role will be won during this omen period. Even if it does not, it is possible to prevent the player's expectations from dropping.

It should be noted that the selection probability of each number of continuous games may be other than the above.
Also, if the player can obtain a specific privilege when winning the rare role during the present sign period, the number of continuous games may be increased.
Further, the number of continuous games set as options for the pseudo-bonus state may be other than the above, or three or more types may be set.
As described above, control is performed when a rare combination is won during the CZ state in the slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment.

[Control form in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41, a control mode in the gaming machine (slot machine 1) of the fourth embodiment will be described.
In the slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, various effects during the CZ state are executed under the control of the sub-controller 20. The control information is received and, for example, an effect on the main display 8 is executed.

However, when executing an instruction effect (including a fake instruction effect) prompting to stop the special symbol combination during the CZ state, the sub-controller 20 receives control information directly from the main controller 10. Different control forms are provided for the case of controlling the instruction performance and the case of controlling the instruction performance independently by the sub-controller 20 without directly receiving control information from the main controller 10.例文帳に追加

Specifically, when the instruction effect is performed when the special replay role that is won in the pseudo-bonus state is won in the CZ state, and when the instruction effect is performed when the special replay role is won during this sign period (Fig. 38 (c ), the control mode is different between ) and ).

First, with reference to FIG. 40, the control form in the case of executing the instruction effect in the game in which the special replay combination is won in the CZ state will be described.
As shown in FIG. 40, in the case of performing an instruction effect (instruction effect other than the present sign period) when a special replay combination that is won in the pseudo-bonus state is won in the CZ state, the main controller 10 controls the instruction effect. is transmitted to the sub-controller 20 as special control information instructing the execution of the sub-controller 20, and the sub-controller 20 receives the control information to display an instruction effect on the main display 8 to prompt the user to stop the special symbol combination. (Arrow a4).

In other words, when the special replay role is won, the main controller 10 transmits the control information to the sub-controller 20 every time that the special replay role is won regardless of the state at that time. At this time, when the lottery for transition to the pseudo-bonus state is won, the control information instructing the execution of the instruction performance is transmitted, and the sub control device 20 receives the control information instructing the execution of the instruction performance. It executes the instruction performance.

When the special replay role is won but the pseudo-bonus state is not won, the main controller 10 transmits control information for prohibiting the execution of the instruction performance, and the sub-controller 20 sends this instruction. By receiving the control information for prohibiting execution of the effect, the effect (press order navigation image 22 in FIG. 35(d)) that does not stop the special symbol combination is executed.
Also, during the fake precursor period, there is a case where a special replay role that is won in a pseudo-bonus state may be won. will be executed.

On the other hand, in the case of winning a rare combination that is won in the pseudo-bonus state during the CZ state, and performing an instruction effect when a special replay combination is won during the subsequent sign period, the main controller 10 controls the instruction effect. Without transmitting control information (special control information) instructing the execution to the sub-controller 20, the sub-controller 20 independently executes an instruction presentation prompting the stop of the special symbol combination on the main display 8. (arrow b4).

That is, when the special replay role is won, the main controller 10 transmits control information indicating that the special replay role has been won. When the information is received, it is determined whether or not the state at that time is in the present sign period, and if the control information that informs the winning of the special replay role during the present sign period is received, the instruction effect is performed. The instruction performance is executed without receiving the control information instructing execution.

Further, when the sub control device 20 receives the control information indicating the winning of the special replay role (not winning in the pseudo-bonus state), it determines whether or not the state at that time is in the fake precursor period. , When control information is received during the fake precursor period, the special symbol combination is not stopped without an instruction from the main controller 10 (press order navigation image in FIG. 35(d)). 22) will be executed.
For example, when the sub control device 20 receives control information indicating the start and end of this precursor period (or the fake precursor period) from the main controller 10, the state at that time changes to the main precursor period (or the fake precursor period). ), management control is performed so that it can be grasped that it is in the middle.

As described above, in the CZ state, when a special replay combination that is won in the pseudo-bonus state is won, the sub-controller 20 performs control to instruct the execution of the instruction performance from the main controller 10. In response to the reception of information, the main display device 8 executes an instruction performance prompting the user to stop the special symbol combination. In the case of performing an instruction performance when a special replay combination is won in the middle, the sub control device 20 does not receive control information instructing execution of the instruction performance from the main controller 10, The main display 8 executes an instruction effect prompting the user to stop the combination of symbols.

That is, the sub control device 20 as the notification control means, in the game in which the lottery result of the lottery means (main control device 10) is the first lottery result (winning the special replay role), the special game state right giving means (main When a special right (a right to transition to a pseudo-bonus state) is granted by the control device 10), a special operation is performed based on the reception of special control information (control information instructing execution of an instruction performance) from the main control device 10. Information (symbol instruction image 52a, operation instruction image 52b) can be notified, and when the special right is granted based on the derivation of the second lottery result from the special game state right granting means, the main control device It is possible to notify the special operation information without receiving the special control information from 10 (control information instructing execution of the instruction performance).

Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of each control device when executing the instruction rendering, and it is possible to execute the instruction rendering more efficiently and reliably.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, a control form in the case of executing a fake instruction effect in a game in which a normal replay combination is won in the CZ state will be described.
As described above, in the CZ state, when a normal replay combination is won, the main display 8 may perform a fake instruction effect (see FIG. 36).

In the fourth embodiment, as in the case of executing the instruction effect described above, even when executing the fake instruction effect, the sub control device 20 receives the fake instruction by directly receiving the control information from the main control device 10. Different control forms are provided for the case of controlling the performance and the case of controlling the fake instruction performance independently by the sub-controller 20 without directly receiving control information from the main controller 10.例文帳に追加

Specifically, as in the case of executing the instruction effect described above, when performing the fake instruction effect when winning a normal replay combination other than the sign period in the CZ state, the sub control device 20 is the main control The fake instruction performance is executed on the main display 8 based on the control information instructing the execution of the fake instruction performance from the device 10, but the fake instruction performance is executed when the normal replay role is won during the sign period. In this case, the sub-controller 20 executes the fake instruction performance on the main display 8 without control information from the main controller 10 instructing execution of the fake instruction performance.

Furthermore, when a normal replay combination is won during a CZ state other than the sign period, main controller 10 determines with a fixed probability (for example, 50%) whether or not to execute the fake instruction effect. , and based on this lottery, control information is transmitted to the sub-controller 20 to instruct the execution of the fake instruction effect. When a normal replay combination is won, whether or not to execute the fake instruction performance is determined by lottery in the sub-control device 20, and the execution probability of the fake instruction performance at the time of the lottery is determined by the player. It can be changed based on the operation.
During the fake precursor period, the fake precursor period (or CZ state) ends based on the winning of a normal replay role, so the sub-controller 20 always executes the fake instruction effect. Also in this case, the sub-controller 20 independently executes the fake instruction effect.

FIG. 41 shows a control form in the case of executing a fake instruction effect in a game in which a normal replay combination is won during this precursor period in the CZ state.
In other words, it shows the control form when the sub control device 20 independently executes the fake instruction effect.

As shown in FIG. 41, when a normal replay combination is won during this sign period in the CZ state, main controller 10 sends control information instructing the execution of a fake instruction effect to sub controller 20. Instead, only the control information indicating the winning of the normal replay combination is transmitted (arrow c4). It is determined whether or not the state of is in the present sign period, and if it is in the present sign period, the fake instruction effect is executed with a predetermined probability.

Then, as shown in the figure, the sub control device 20 controls the execution of the fake instruction effect with a first probability (for example, 40%) in mode 1 and a second probability higher than the first probability (for example, 60%). ) is provided, and when control information indicating winning of a normal replay combination is received, the execution probability of the fake instruction performance can be changed according to these modes.
In addition, the sub control device 20 enables mode change control based on the operation of the effect button 2d, and the player can change to a desired mode by operating the effect button 2d.

Therefore, when the mode 1 is selected based on the operation of the effect button 2d, the execution of the fake instruction effect during the present sign period is controlled to be executed with the first probability (for example, 40%), and the mode When 2 is selected, the execution of the fake instruction effect during this sign period is controlled to be executed with a second probability (for example, 60%).

It should be noted that the mode can be changed, for example, by displaying the mode selection screen on the main display 8 in a state where the game is not being played (so-called calling state) and operating the mode selection screen with the effect button 2d. Alternatively, a mode selection screen may be displayed on the sub-display 17 and the mode selection screen may be executed by touch operation, but it is preferable to enable selection before this precursor period.

Also, although not shown, the sub control device 20 always executes the fake instruction effect when it receives control information indicating winning of a normal replay combination during the fake precursor period.
Therefore, when a normal replay role is won during the fake precursor period, the fake instruction effect is always executed, and as a result, the fake precursor period (or CZ state) ends without stopping the special symbol combination. It will be done.

As described above, when a normal replay combination is won outside of the premonitory period in the CZ state, the sub control device 20 receives control information from the main control device 10 instructing execution of the fake instruction effect. While the fake instruction effect is executed on the main display 8, when a normal replay role is won during the sign period, the sub-controller 20 instructs the execution of the fake instruction effect from the main controller 10. The sub-controller 20 independently executes the fake instruction effect on the main display 8 without receiving the control information.

Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load of each control device when executing the fake instruction effect, and it is possible to execute the fake instruction effect more efficiently and reliably.

Further, in the sub control device 20, when a normal replay combination is won during this sign period, the fake instruction effect can be executed with either the first probability or the second probability.
Therefore, it is possible to diversify the presentation mode during the present sign period, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the sub control device 20 can change the execution probability of the fake instruction effect when the normal replay combination is won during the present sign period based on the operation of the effect button 2d.
That is, the sub control device 20 as the notification control means, with a predetermined probability in the game in which the lottery result of the lottery means (main control device 10) is not the first lottery result (winning the special replay role), the special operation information (symbol instruction It is possible to notify the image 52a and the operation instruction image 52b), and it is provided with notification change control means capable of changing the predetermined probability based on the operation of the player.

Therefore, it is possible to switch between a mode (mode 2) in which the fake instruction performance is frequently executed and a mode (mode 1) in which the fake instruction performance is not often executed according to the taste of the player, which satisfies many players. It becomes possible to execute a game to play.

Note that the execution probabilities of the fake instruction effects in mode 1 and mode 2 may be any as long as the respective execution probabilities are different.
Also, three or more modes with different execution probabilities of the fake instruction performance may be provided.
Also, the fake instruction performance is executed when a normal replay combination is won, but may be executed when any combination other than the special replay combination is won.
As described above, the control mode in the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment is realized.

The slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment has been described above, but if a special operation (reverse push) is performed when a normal replay combination is won without providing a special replay combination, the symbol combination of "7, 7, 7" is performed. is stopped and an operation other than the special operation is performed, the symbol combination of ``replay, replay, replay'' is stopped, and a lottery in a pseudo-bonus state may be performed when a normal replay combination is won.
In this case, during the present sign period due to the winning of the rare combination, an instruction performance for stopping the symbol combination of "7, 7, 7" may be given at the time of winning the normal replay.

In addition, when a rare role is won during the omen period, a lottery is performed to select the number of games to be continued in the pseudo-bonus state. A lottery may be executed to add the number of games to be added in the pseudo-bonus state.
The slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment is configured as described above.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a game machine according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 50. FIG.

The gaming machine (slot machine 1) of the fifth embodiment differs from the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment only in part of the game state transition control and effect contents. It is the same as the first embodiment.
Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, only the points that are different from the first embodiment will be described, and the other points are the same as the above-described first embodiment, so the description will be omitted.

First, in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, a part of the structure of the combination is different from that of the first embodiment, and a bonus combination is set in addition to the replay combination and the minor combination.
The bonus combination is a combination for generating a bonus state, which is a so-called real bonus, and the occurrence of the bonus state based on the winning of the bonus combination results in, for example, a lottery for a predetermined combination that is advantageous to the player. .

As replay roles, in addition to normal replay roles and chance replay roles (chance roles), special replay roles are provided as rare roles.
Although the details will be described later, the special replay combination is, for example, a combination that can grant a predetermined privilege to the player in the AT state by winning, and the winning probability is set lower than that of the normal replay combination (for example, , 1/100).

Also, in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, the types of game states are also different from those of the above-described first embodiment. there is
Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, the normal game state, the bonus state, and the AT state are provided as game states.

If the bonus combination is won, the reels are arranged so as to allow a symbol combination of "7, 7, 7" (a special symbol combination) on the effective line set on each reel 4 in subsequent games. When the stop control of 4 is performed and the symbol combination of "7.7.7" stops on the activated line, a bonus combination is won and the game state shifts to the bonus state.

That is, in the first embodiment, in the first game in the pseudo-bonus state, the symbol combination of "7, 7, 7" is pseudo-stopped by executing a pseudo-game. In the fifth embodiment, when the symbol combination of "7.7.7" is stopped, the bonus state is generated.
When the bonus combination is won, no game value such as payout of medals is given, and the right to win the bonus combination is maintained until the bonus combination is won.
In addition, in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, only the middle line connecting the symbols stopped in the middle of each reel 4 is set as the valid line for judging winning.

[Transition of game state in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment]
Next, referring to FIG. 42, the game state transition in the slot machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment will be described.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the transition of game states in the slot machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 42, in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, the main controller 10 can shift to any one of the normal game state, bonus state, and AT state. It is possible to execute control to shift from one game state to another game state based on the fact that it is established.

Below, each game state (normal game state, bonus state, AT state) executed under the control of the main control device 10 and the sub-control device 20, transition processing between game states, and various effects generated along with the transition processing etc. will be described in detail for each game state.

Hereinafter, unless otherwise specified, the point of transition from each game state to another game state is basically after the third reel stop operation of the game in which the transition condition is established (or after the payout of medals is completed). is. However, it is not limited to this, and the next game may be shifted after the transition condition is established.

(Normal game state)
The normal game state is a game state in which the main controller 10 of the slot machine 1 stays when it is reset, and is a disadvantageous state for the player.
As shown in FIG. 42, main controller 10 performs lottery processing for transition to bonus state and AT state while staying in the normal game state. Depending on the specification of the slot machine 1 or the like, the normal game state may not be directly shifted to the AT state.

During the normal game state, as in the first embodiment, based on the lottery result of the winning combination, etc., the main display 8 or the sub-display 17 displays an individual effect including a winning effect that is completed in one game with a predetermined probability. executed.

In addition, in the normal game state, there are a normal probability state and a high probability state in which winning probability states for the AT state are different. The probability of winning the lottery to transition to the AT state is higher in the high probability state than in the normal probability state. , control is performed to shift from the normal probability state to the high probability state. On the other hand, as a predetermined fall condition, for example, control is performed to shift from the high probability state to the normal probability state with a probability of 5% when the replay combination is won, when the push-order bell combination is won, and when the combination is lost.
In addition, in response to the change of the probability state, stage change processing is performed in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, and a part of the high probability state is changed to a stage suggesting the high probability state.

・Transition processing from normal game state to bonus state (arrow a5 in FIG. 42)
In the normal game state, it is possible to shift to a bonus state (privilege) as a special game state based on the winning of the bonus combination as a result of the determination of the combination by the main controller 10 .

More specifically, the main controller 10 stops allowing a special symbol combination ("7.7.7") as a special symbol mode on the reels 4 based on the winning of a bonus combination as a special lottery result. When a special symbol combination is drawn to the reels 4 based on the operation of the player, the game state is shifted to a bonus state as a special game state advantageous to the player.

That is, the main controller 10 is a special game state control means capable of generating a first special game state (bonus state) as a special game state based on establishment of the first special condition (derivation of a special lottery result). It is prepared.
Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, the pseudo-bonus state can be generated. ) can be generated.

Also in the fifth embodiment, a pseudo-bonus state may be generated in addition to the bonus state.
Also, the bonus role may be won simultaneously with the winning of a predetermined rare role (for example, a strong cherry role) (double winning), or may be won independently of other roles. , both winning patterns of double winning and single winning may be provided.
In addition, since the bonus combination gives the player an opportunity to win a large number of medals, it is possible to set the winning probability lower than that of the minor combination and the replay combination (for example, set the probability to about 1/250). preferable.
Also, the probability of winning a bonus combination may be changed in a plurality of stages according to the setting value of the probability setting device 14. FIG.

In addition, when a bonus combination is won in the normal game state, a continuous effect over a predetermined number of games that is executed immediately before the transition to the pseudo-bonus state of the first embodiment is executed on the main display 8, for example. , to increase the player's expectations.
Then, when the continuous performance is executed, a performance image in which the main character wins as a result of the battle performance is displayed, and an image is displayed to inform the player that the bonus role has finally been won. The main display 8 displays an image prompting the user to stop the special symbol combination.
However, it is possible to stop the special symbol combination even in the game during the continuous effect, so if the special symbol combination is stopped in the game during the continuous effect, the continuous effect will end at that point. Become.

Further, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, even in a game in which a bonus combination has not been won, an effect similar to the continuous effect is executed on the main display 8. For example, a bonus combination and a predetermined rare combination can be simultaneously won. In this case, when a predetermined rare combination that has not been won as a bonus combination is won, a continuous effect is executed in which the main character is finally defeated.

・Transition processing from normal game state to AT state (arrow c5 in FIG. 42)
In the normal game state, the main controller 10 performs lottery processing for shifting to the AT state as a special game state based on the winning of a predetermined rare combination. For example, when a strong cherry combination is won, the transition processing to the AT state is performed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1%). The condition for transitioning to the AT state is winning the transition lottery.
In addition, in the game in the high probability state, control is performed to increase the lottery probability of transition to the AT state. ) to perform transition processing to the AT state.
In addition, the transition to the AT state in the normal game state is performed on the condition that a predetermined rare combination is won, and a predetermined probability ( For example, 1%) may be used.

In the fifth embodiment, the transition to the AT state is executed mainly via the bonus state in order to increase the player's sense of expectation. The probability of transitioning to the state is set to a very low probability.
In addition, depending on the set probability in the probability setting device 14, it may be possible to change the probability of directly shifting from the normal game state to the AT state, or only in the case of relatively high set values (for example, setting 4 to 6) It may be possible to win a lottery for transition from the normal game state directly to the AT state.

In addition, in the normal game state, when the lottery for transition to the AT state is won, an indication effect (including continuous effect) is executed after the waiting period has elapsed, as in the case of the occurrence of the pseudo-bonus state in the first embodiment. , the AT state is generated after the end of the sign effect.
Further, when a predetermined rare combination (for example, a strong cherry combination) is won and the AT state is not won, the same fake precursor effect as when the pseudo-bonus state of the first embodiment occurs is executed. It's becoming

In addition, when winning the lottery for transition from the normal game state directly to the AT state, it is possible to immediately execute the continuous performance without executing the sign performance, and to shift to the AT state after the continuous performance is executed. good.
Also, as in the case of transition to the pseudo-bonus state in the first embodiment, a CZ state that allows transition to the AT state may be provided.

(bonus state)
A bonus state as a special game state (first special game state) is a state in which the main control device 10 controls the lottery for a winning combination more favorably to the player than in the normal game state.
That is, in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, a pseudo-bonus state is generated as a state advantageous to the player. A bonus state, which is a bonus, is generated.

The bonus state continues until the number of medals paid out during the bonus state exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 150). The probability of winning a common bell combination is made higher than in the game in the normal game state.
Also in the fifth embodiment, similarly to the above-described first embodiment, when any one of the push order bell combinations 1 to 6 is won, the main controller 10 corresponds to the winning push order bell combination. Only when a stop operation is performed according to the pressing order (specific stopping mode), stop control is performed so that the corresponding pressing order bell combination wins.

Control advantageous to the player during the bonus state may be other than the above. For example, the probability of winning a predetermined rare role may be made higher than in the game during the normal game state, or a replay role may be won. By setting the probability to be lower than that of the game in the normal game state, the chances of winning the winning combination of the order of pressing the bell may be increased accordingly. Also, the winning probability of the bell combination in the order of pressing may be increased.

Also, the number of medals to be paid out when the bell combination (push order bell combination and common bell combination) is won may be set differently between the bonus state and the other game states.
For example, 6 medals may be paid out if the bell combination is won during the normal game state, but 15 medals may be paid out if the bell combination is won during the bonus state. .

In addition, although the condition for terminating the bonus state is set when the number of medals paid out during the bonus state exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 150), other conditions are also possible. It may be set when the number of games reaches a predetermined number. In addition, when the number of medals acquired by the player during the bonus state (the number of net increases) exceeds a predetermined number, the bonus state may be terminated, or the player may be awarded a prize by winning the bell role during the bonus state. The bonus state may be ended when the number of acquired medals (the number of net increase) exceeds a predetermined number.

In addition, although the details will be described later, during the bonus state, an effect is performed in which it is impossible or difficult for the player to distinguish that the game state at that time is in the AT state. In the section, the same push order navigation as when the push order bell combination is won may be executed.
In this case, if the common bell combination is won, it may be possible to execute push order navigation (for example, "5a→5b→5c") that indicates a fixed order of pushes among the six push orders. Alternatively, the pressing order may be randomly determined and the pressing order navigation may be executed.

During the bonus state, based on the control information from the main controller 10, the sub-controller 20 executes the push-order navigation for the above-described push-order bell combination as notification of an operation mode advantageous to the player. Earning medals is easy.

In addition, although the details will be described later, in the game during the bonus state, the main controller 10 performs the AT state transition lottery process in an advantageous manner for the player, so that the AT state is won with a predetermined probability for each game. control is performed.
In the game during the bonus state, if the AT state shift lottery is won, the right to shift to the AT state is granted, and the shift to the AT state is possible after the bonus state ends.
That is, the main control device 10 as a special game state control means generates a second special game state (AT state) as a special game state based on establishment of the second special condition (winning of lottery for transition to AT state). is possible.

Note that the winning probability of the AT state may be anything as long as the probability of shifting to the AT state is higher than the winning probability (for example, 1%) of the AT state in the normal probability state.
Also, in the game during a part of the bonus state, a transition lottery with a higher winning probability in the AT state may be performed.

Also, when a bonus role is won, an AT state transition lottery is held, and like the AT state transition lottery in the game during the bonus state, if the transition lottery is won, the AT state transition right is granted. It will be done.

In addition, during the bonus state, the sub-control device 20 performs various effects during the bonus state. becomes.
When the bonus state is generated, the lamp 11 emits light in a predetermined manner to notify that the bonus state is in effect, and the speaker 9 outputs a predetermined sound effect to notify that the bonus state is in effect.
That is, the sub-control device 20 can execute the first special effect that allows the player to recognize that the first special game state is occurring based on the occurrence of the first special game state (bonus state). A special effect control means is provided.

In addition, as will be described later, when a bonus combination is won or when a lottery for transition to the AT state is won during the bonus state, the game state will shift to the AT state after the bonus state ends. In the fifth embodiment, since the display control is performed so that it is impossible or difficult to distinguish between the bonus state and the AT state, even if the AT state transition lottery is won during the bonus state, There is no effect for notifying that the lottery for transition to the AT state has been won.

Further, when the gaming state is shifted to the bonus state, information indicating the bonus state is output from the external output terminal 18 .
It should be noted that, in order to prevent an announcement to distinguish between the bonus state and the AT state, the calling device (not shown) of the island facility on the amusement center side outputs common information for the bonus state and the AT state. good too.

・Transition processing from bonus state to AT state (arrow e5 in FIG. 42)
The bonus state ends when a predetermined end condition is met.
The condition for terminating the bonus state is established when the number of paid out medals (including the number of medals left out) during the bonus state exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 150).
The condition for ending the bonus state may be other than the above, and may be when the number of games during the bonus state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 times).

When the right to shift to the AT state is granted at the end of the bonus state, the game state shifts from the bonus state to the AT state as a special game state (second special game state).
However, even if the game state shifts from the bonus state to the AT state, various effects executed during the bonus state continue as they are.
During the AT state, the push order navigation is executed in the same manner as during the bonus state, and since the contents of the presentation are basically the same as during the bonus state, the game state shifts from the bonus state to the AT state. Also, the player recognizes that the bonus state continues as it is.

・Transition processing from bonus state to normal game state (arrow b5 in FIG. 42)
When the right to shift to the AT state is not given when the bonus state ends, the game state shifts from the bonus state to the normal game state due to the fulfillment of the conditions for ending the bonus state.
At this time, after the final game in the bonus state is over, an image informing that the bonus state has ended, an image informing the number of medals won during the bonus state, and the like are displayed on the main display unit 8, and the next game is started. The game state shifts to the normal game state.

It should be noted that, during the transition from the bonus state to the normal game state, the setting related information (setting suggestive information) may be notified by notification means (main display 8, sub-display 17, speaker 9). For example, a predetermined character out of a plurality of characters is displayed on the main display 8 and the sub display 17, and the displayed character is selected according to the selection probability preset according to each setting value of the probability setting device 14. By selecting the setting value by using the displayed character, the set value may be predicted to some extent.

(AT state)
In the AT state, in the game during the AT state, as notification of an operation mode that is advantageous to the player, push order navigation for the winning push order bell role is continuously performed for the relevant period, thereby facilitating the acquisition of medals. It is in play state.
However, unlike the bonus state, the lottery control for the combination is the same as in the normal game state, so the lottery control for each combination is executed in the same manner as in the normal game state.

During the AT state, a predetermined number of medals (for example, 100 or 150) given at the time of the initial transition to the AT state is managed as the remaining number of medals for continuing the AT state, and medals are awarded by executing the game. is subtracted each time is paid out, and the AT state is continued until the number of remaining medals is exhausted.
In addition, in the game during the AT state, for example, when a rare role is won, an additional lottery is performed in which a predetermined number of medals is added (added) to the number of remaining medals with a predetermined probability. As the number of remaining medals increases, the duration of the AT state is extended.

For example, if you win the strong cherry role, either 50 or 100 medals will be added to the remaining number of medals, and if you win the special replay role, 30 or 50 medals will be added. An additional lottery will be held to add to the number of remaining medals.
It should be noted that the additional lottery triggering role, the number of medals to be added, or the winning probability of the additional lottery may be any, but it is preferable that the additional lottery that is advantageous to the player is carried out as the winning probability is relatively low. .
Then, when the number of remaining medals in the AT state runs out, the AT state ends.

In the fifth embodiment, the end condition of the AT state is the same as the end condition of the bonus state in order to improve the interest of the bonus state and various effects (for example, continuous effects) during the AT state. Although the game is established based on the number of paid out medals, the condition for ending the AT state may be established based on the number of medals (net increase in number) earned by the player during the AT state.
In addition, a predetermined number of games (for example, 30 games) are given at the initial transition of the AT state, continuation is managed as the number of remaining games in which the AT state can be continued, and the number of remaining games is subtracted for each game to obtain the remaining number of games. The AT state may be continued until the number of games is exhausted.

During the AT state, control information relating to the AT state is transmitted from the main controller 10 to the sub-controller 20 , and various effect images are displayed on the main display 8 under the control of the sub-controller 20 .
As described above, the bonus state and the AT state are basically indistinguishable (or difficult).

Although the details will be described later, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the AT state, the sub-control device 20 may control to execute an effect that allows the player to recognize that the AT state is in effect.
That is, the sub control device 20 as a special effect control means provides a second special effect that allows the player to recognize that the second special game state is occurring based on the occurrence of the second special game state (AT state). can be executed.

・Transition processing from AT state to bonus state (arrow f5 in FIG. 42)
Also during the AT state (second special game state), the lottery for the combination is performed in the main controller 10 in the same manner as in the normal game state.
Therefore, even in the AT state, the lottery for the bonus combination is performed in the same manner as in the normal game state, and when the bonus combination is won, the right to shift to the bonus state is granted.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, in a game in which a bonus combination and other combination are won, the main controller 10 gives priority to stopping the combination other than the bonus combination. I am trying to control the stop.
In addition, when the bonus combination is won in the AT state, the fact that the bonus combination has been won is not notified. When the role is won, the pushing order navigation is executed.

Therefore, when a bonus role is won in the AT state, there is no change in performance from the state before the bonus role is won. ) is preferentially won, the player runs the game in the AT state without recognizing that the bonus combination has been won.
Then, based on the end of the AT state, it is notified that the bonus combination has been won (acquired the right to shift to the bonus state), and the player can immediately shift to the bonus state in the game after the end of the AT state.
In addition, in the same manner as described above, when a bonus combination is won in the AT state, and in the game during the bonus state, the AT state transition lottery is performed again.

Note that the notification of the winning of the bonus combination may be executed in the final game in the AT state (including after the game is over), or may be executed in the next game after the final game in the AT state.
Also, in the game during the AT state, when all the combinations other than the bonus combination are not won, the special combination of symbols can be stopped, but in this case, the special combination of symbols is not stopped. It is preferable to perform such a production.

For example, on a predetermined reel 4, a blank symbol (preferably a relatively conspicuous symbol) is set with an interval that overlaps with the symbol ("7") constituting a special symbol combination and cannot be drawn in, and a bonus combination is set. In the AT state game in which the player wins , when all the combinations other than the bonus combination are not won, it is preferable to execute an effect to prompt a stop operation aiming at this blank symbol.

However, in a game in which a bonus combination is won during the AT state, if all the combinations other than the bonus combination are not won, the special combination of symbols can be stopped, so the special combination of symbols is stopped. If so, the game state will shift from the AT state to the bonus combination at that time.

In the game during the AT state, when the special symbol combination is stopped, the AT state being executed is temporarily interrupted, the game state is shifted to the bonus state, and when the bonus state ends. , and is shifted to the AT state again.
In addition, when the AT state transitions to the bonus state, the number of remaining medals in the AT state will be reserved at the time of transition to the bonus state, and when returning to the AT state again, the AT state will resume from the reserved number of remaining medals. (Arrow e5 in FIG. 42).

However, in the case of shifting to the bonus state in the middle of the AT state, unlike the case of shifting to the bonus state during the normal game state (including after the end of the AT state), the AT state transition lottery process is not performed in advance. When the prescribed medals are paid out, the bonus state ends and the AT state is restored.

If the AT state transitions to the bonus state in the middle of the AT state, in the game during the bonus state, a predetermined number of medals (for example, 10) is added to the number of remaining AT state medals instead of the AT state transition lottery. A lottery may be conducted for the addition (addition).
However, in this case, the lottery should be set so that the player can obtain a greater benefit when transitioning to the bonus state after the end of the AT state than when transitioning to the bonus state from the middle of the AT state. is preferred.

・Transition processing from AT state to normal game state (arrow d5 in FIG. 42)
In the AT state, when the condition for ending the AT state is met, that is, when the number of remaining medals in the AT state is exhausted, the normal game state is entered after the AT state ends.
It should be noted that even if the right to transition to the bonus state is granted in the game during the AT state, if the conditions for ending the AT state are satisfied, the state will be shifted to the normal game state once, but in this case, When the special symbol combination is stopped during the normal game state, the game immediately shifts to the bonus state.

When the AT state is shifted to the normal game state, the winning probability state in the AT state is controlled to be the normal probability state. At this time, the state may be shifted to the high probability state with a predetermined probability for each setting in the probability setting device 14 .
In addition, in the case of transitioning to a high probability state after the end of the AT state, there is a possibility that limit control (limiter control) by the above-described limiting means is performed during the high probability state, but the limit during the high probability state When the control is performed, it is shifted to the normal probability state.

Also, when the AT state ends, an ending state is set for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), the progress of the game is temporarily disabled during the ending state, and after the ending state ends, the normal game state is entered. Become.
During the ending state, under the control of the main controller 10 and the sub-controller 20, setting-related information capable of suggesting the set value set by the probability setting device 14 is notified by the notification means. For example, a predetermined image is displayed by the main display 8 and the sub-display 17 and a predetermined sound is output from the speaker 9 .
As described above, the game state transition is performed in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment.

[AT State Shift Lottery Control in Gaming Machine of Fifth Embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44, the AT state shift lottery control in the slot machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment will be described.

As described above, when the bonus combination is won or in the game during the bonus state, the AT state transition lottery is performed by the main controller 10, and if the player wins the transition lottery, the AT state transition right is granted. will be granted.
Hereinafter, the probabilities of each lottery result when the AT state transition lottery is performed by the main controller 10 will be described.

First, FIG. 43 shows the probability of each lottery result in the AT state transition lottery when a bonus combination is won.
In addition, the main controller 10 performs an AT state transition lottery by extracting a predetermined random number when a bonus combination is won.
Also, when a bonus combination is won during the AT state, a similar transition lottery is performed.

As shown in FIG. 43, in the AT state transition lottery when the bonus combination is won, there is a 90% probability that the AT state will not be won, and there is a 9% probability that the initial remaining number of medals will be 100 AT state. , and an AT state transition lottery is performed so that AT state with an initial remaining number of medals of 150 will be won with a probability of 1%.
When the AT state is won by the transition lottery, the right to shift to the AT state is granted from the time when the bonus combination is won, and the corresponding number of remaining medals is stored.

As described above, since the AT state transition lottery is performed when the bonus combination is won, there is a possibility that the AT state transition right will be granted before the transition to the bonus state occurs, and the player's expectation is increased. It can be improved.
In addition, the AT state transition lottery enables the generation of AT states with different numbers of remaining medals to be awarded at the initial stage, thereby enabling the generation of more diverse AT states and improving the player's sense of expectation. is possible.

It should be noted that the AT state transition lottery when the bonus combination is won is also executed when the bonus combination is won in the game in the AT state. After the end of the state, the transition to the bonus state is made, and after the end of the bonus state, the transition to the AT state is decided again.
Although the number of medals to be paid out during the AT state is set as the number of remaining medals to be given at the initial stage, the number of medals (net increase) that the player acquires during the AT state is set. good too.

Next, FIG. 44 shows the probability of each lottery result in the AT state transition lottery and the additional lottery when each game is executed during the bonus state.
It should be noted that the main controller 10 performs each lottery by extracting a predetermined random number when executing the game in which the lottery is performed.

First, FIG. 44(a) shows the lottery result when the right to shift to the AT state has not yet been granted.
As shown in FIG. 44(a), if a role other than the rare role is won in the game during the bonus state, there is a 95% probability that the AT state will not be won, and there is a 4% probability that the medals remaining at the time of the initial stage will not be won. An AT state transition lottery is performed so that AT state with 100 medals is won, and AT state with 150 remaining medals at the initial stage is won with a probability of 1%.

Also, if a rare role is won in the game during the bonus state, there is a 60% chance that the AT state will not be won, and there will be a 30% chance that the player will win the AT state with 100 remaining medals at the start. , AT state transition lottery is performed so that AT state winning with 150 remaining medals at the initial stage is won with a probability of 10%.
When the AT state is won by the transition lottery, the right to shift to the AT state is granted when the game is executed in the bonus state, and the corresponding number of remaining medals is stored.

Next, FIG. 44(b) shows a case in which the right to shift to the AT state has already been granted, that is, at the time of winning the bonus combination or in the game during the bonus state, the bonus after winning the lottery for shifting to the AT state. It shows the lottery result of the additional lottery in the game during the state.
In the fifth embodiment, when the AT state transition right has already been granted, instead of granting the AT state transition right, a predetermined number An additional lottery for adding (adding) medals is performed.

As shown in FIG. 44(b), if a player wins a role other than a rare role in a game in a bonus state in which the right to shift to the AT state has already been granted, there is a 93% probability that the additional lottery will not be won. , with a 5% chance of winning by adding (adding) 10 medals to the remaining number of medals, and with a 2% chance of winning by adding (adding) 20 medals to the remaining number of medals. A top-up lottery will be held.

In addition, if you win a rare role in a game in a bonus state in which the right to shift to AT state has already been granted, there is a 20% chance that you will not win the extra lottery, and there is a 50% chance that the number of remaining medals will be 10. An extra lottery is conducted in which winning is achieved by adding (adding) 20 medals, and winning is achieved by adding (adding) 20 medals to the number of remaining medals with a probability of 30%.
When winning the above-mentioned addition lottery, the number of remaining medals increased by the number of medals added is stored.

As described above, since the AT state transition lottery is performed in the game in the bonus state, there is a possibility that the AT state transition right will be granted in each game in the bonus state, and the player's expectation. can be improved.
Also, when the rare combination is won, the AT state transition lottery is more advantageous for the player than when the winning combination is other than the rare combination.
Therefore, when a rare combination is won in a game in the bonus state, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation.

In addition, even in the game during the bonus state after the AT state transition right is granted, an additional lottery is performed in which a predetermined number of medals are added to the number of remaining medals. It is possible to reduce the player's sense of dissatisfaction due to the fact that the AT state transition lottery is not performed, and to improve the player's sense of expectation.

If a bonus combination is won in a game in the AT state, but the bonus state occurs in the middle of the AT state without waiting for the end of the AT state, the AT state transition lottery in the game in the bonus state is not performed. Instead, it is preferable to perform an additional lottery shown in FIG. 44(b).
Therefore, in this case, if a bonus combination is won in a game in the AT state, it is more advantageous for the player to shift to the bonus state after the AT state ends.

Note that the probability of obtaining each lottery result may be other than the above as long as the above-described tendency can be formed.
Also, the number of remaining medals that defines the duration of the AT state may be other than the above, or three or more options may be provided.
Also, the number of medals to be added may be other than the above, and three or more options may be provided.
In addition, the lottery result may be changed according to the type of rare role won. For example, if a rare role with a relatively low probability of winning (for example, a strong cherry role) is won, more games are played. A lottery may be conducted so that a lottery result that is advantageous to the person is derived.
As described above, the AT state transition lottery control is performed in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment.

[Control in the Case of Winning the AT State Transition Lottery During the Bonus State in the Gaming Machine of the Fifth Embodiment]
Next, referring to FIGS. 45 to 47, in the gaming machine (slot machine 1) of the fifth embodiment, the control by the main controller 10 when winning the AT state transition lottery during the bonus state, and display control (display contents) in the sub-controller 20 will be described.

First, referring to the timing chart of FIG. 45, transition of the game state according to the progress of the game and display contents (effect) on the main display 8 when winning the AT state transition lottery during the bonus state. will be explained.
As shown in FIG. 45, when a bonus combination is won in a game in which the game state is the normal game state (timing t50), the right to shift to the bonus state is granted, and the special symbol combination is stopped in subsequent games. Possible reel 4 stop control is performed.
When a bonus combination is won, an AT state transition lottery is performed, but in the illustration, the transition lottery at this time is not won.

In addition, in the game after winning the bonus combination in the normal game state, the main display 8 executes an instruction effect prompting the user to stop the special symbol combination.
Then, when the player who has confirmed the instruction effect performs an appropriate operation capable of stopping the special symbol combination, the special symbol combination ("7.7.7") is stopped on the effective line of the reels 4. (timing t51).

When the special symbol combination stops, the game state is changed from the normal game state to the bonus state, and the effect on the main display 8 or the like changes from the effect corresponding to the normal game state to the effect corresponding to the bonus state (first special production) will be changed.
Further, when the player wins the push order bell combination in each game due to the transition to the bonus state, the push order navigation is executed on the main display 8 .
At this time, even when the common bell combination is won, the pressing order navigation may be executed.

When the gaming state shifts to the bonus state, an AT state transition lottery is performed in the game during the bonus state.
Then, in the game during the bonus state, when the AT state transition lottery is won (timing t52), the AT state transition right is granted.
Therefore, after that, the game in the bonus state is executed with the right to shift to the AT state being granted.

Also, even when the AT state transition lottery is won, the effect on the main display 8 is not changed, and the effect (first special effect) corresponding to the bonus state is continuously executed.
Then, during the bonus state, when a game (final game) that satisfies the condition for ending the bonus state is executed (timing t53), the bonus state ends at the end of the game.
At this time, if the right to shift to the AT state has been granted, the next game can be started without executing the effect for notifying the end of the bonus state.

Then, when the next game after the bonus state ends (timing t54), the game state is shifted to the AT state.
Also, even if the game state is changed from the bonus state to the AT state, the main display 8 continues to perform the effect (first special effect) corresponding to the bonus state.
Therefore, even when the game state is shifted from the bonus state to the AT state, the player proceeds with the game without noticing it.

Then, when a game that satisfies the condition for ending the AT state is executed during the AT state (timing t55), the AT state ends at the end of the game.
Further, in response to the end of the AT state, the game state is changed from the AT state to the normal game state, and the effect on the main display 8 or the like changes from the effect (second special effect) corresponding to the AT state to the normal game state. will be changed to a corresponding production.
In addition, due to the transition to the normal game state, the push order navigation on the main display 8 is not executed even if the push order bell combination is won in each game.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, when the bonus combination is won or the game is in the bonus state, when the AT state transition lottery is won, the main controller 10 enters the bonus state. , the AT state is generated.

That is, the main control device 10 as a special game state control means, when the second special condition is satisfied (won the AT state transition lottery) in relation to the occurrence of the first special game state (bonus state), It comprises second special game state control means capable of generating a second special game state (AT state) after the first special game state ends.
Therefore, the AT state occurs following the bonus state, and it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation.

Further, when the AT state is generated after the bonus state ends, the effect corresponding to the bonus state on the main display 8 which has been executed until then is continuously executed even in the AT state.

That is, when the second special game state (AT state) is generated by the second special game state control means (main control device 10), the sub control device 20 as the special effect control means is in the second special game state. , it is possible to continuously execute the first special effect (the effect corresponding to the bonus state).
Therefore, even when the game state is changed from the bonus state to the AT state, it is possible to realize the game content as if the bonus state were extended without making the player aware of it, thereby providing a novel game that has never existed before. It is possible to improve interest by providing contents.

In the figure, the case in which the right to shift to the AT state is granted in the game during the bonus state has been explained, but the same effect is executed when the right to shift to the AT state is granted when the bonus combination is won.
Also, the AT state transition lottery timing may be other than the above. For example, it may be the time when the special symbol combination is stopped, the time when the first game in the bonus state is started, or the time when the last game in the bonus state is finished.

Next, various effects during the bonus state in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 46 shows an effect image on the main display 8 when the effect (first special effect) corresponding to the bonus state is executed, and the case where the bonus state is shifted to the AT state and the case where the bonus state ends. Shows the production image of.

The main controller 10 transmits to the sub controller 20 control information related to the bonus state, such as information that can specify the start and end of the bonus state and information that can specify whether there is a right to shift to the AT state. The device 20 executes an effect (first special effect) corresponding to the bonus state by displaying various effect images related to the bonus state on the main display 8 based on the received control information.
Further, in response to the execution of the effect corresponding to the bonus state on the main display 8, the speaker 9 outputs a predetermined sound effect and the lamp 11 outputs a predetermined ornamental light.

First, as shown in FIG. 46(a), during the bonus state, a bonus state image 60a is displayed on the main portion of the screen of the main display 8 to notify that the bonus state is in effect. An effect (first special effect) is executed.
The bonus state image 60a may be any image that allows the player to recognize that the bonus state is in effect and that enhances interest during the bonus state. be done.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, whether or not the bonus state continues at predetermined intervals such as when the number of medals paid out during the bonus state reaches, for example, 50, 100, or 150. A continuation effect is executed for informing whether or not.
Therefore, for example, during execution of a game in which the number of medals paid out during the bonus state is 50, a continuation effect image 61a consisting of text information of "continuation chance" as shown in FIG. 46(b) is displayed. It is displayed in the lower part of the bonus state image 60a, and the continuation effect is executed.

When the bonus state continues to the next game without ending yet, as shown in FIG. It is displayed in the lower part of the state image 60a to notify that the bonus state will continue.

On the other hand, when the bonus state ends, as shown in FIG. 46(d), a bonus end image 61c consisting of character information "bonus ended" at the end of the game and a A bonus game number image 61d (“40 G” in the figure) indicating the number of games and a payout medal number image 61e (“120 in the figure”) indicating the number of medals paid out during the bonus state are displayed on the main display 8. will be displayed in the center of the screen.
At this time, the number of medals actually obtained by the player (net increase number) may be displayed.

As mentioned above, during the bonus state, the number of medals paid out and the number of games played during the bonus state are not displayed. Whether or not the bonus state will continue is notified at predetermined game intervals to the player who has not yet grasped the bonus state by executing the above-described continuous effect.
In addition, it is possible to prevent the bonus state from suddenly ending due to the execution of the continuous effect, which reduces the interest in the bonus state.

Also, in the case of shifting to the AT state immediately after the bonus state ends, in a game in which the maximum number of medals to be paid out during the bonus state is 150, the same continuous effect as described above is executed, and the bonus state is finalized. After the game is over, a continuation determination image 61b as shown in FIG. 46(c) is displayed below the bonus state image 60a to notify that the bonus state will continue.
The bonus state image 60a is continuously displayed on the main portion of the screen of the main display 8 even in the game after the game state shifts to the AT state.
However, in this case, although the continuation of the bonus state is announced, the game state actually shifts to the AT state from the next game.

That is, the continuous effect executed when the number of medals to be paid out during the bonus state reaches, for example, 50 or 100 is executed while the bonus state is continuing, whereas the medals are paid out. The continuation effect executed when the number of sheets reaches 150 is executed when the game state shifts from the bonus state to the AT state, and even when the bonus state ends in this way, the continuation will continue in the middle. By executing an effect similar to the effect, it is obscured that the game state has changed from the bonus state to the AT state.

In addition, even after the transition to the AT state, the number of medals paid out during the AT state, for example, 50, 100, 150, etc., is the same as during the bonus state. A continuation effect for informing whether or not the (actually AT state) continues is executed.
Therefore, even after the transition from the bonus state to the AT state, the continuous effect is continuously executed at predetermined game intervals. It becomes unclear whether it is a state or not.

It should be noted that a plurality of bonus states with different ending conditions may be generated, and after providing a bonus state that ends when the number of medals paid out exceeds, for example, 50 or 100, the same as above is provided. You may make it perform the continuation production|presentation of.
In this way, each branch point at which the bonus state may end corresponds to the point in time when the continuous performance is executed, and the interest of the continuous performance is further improved.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, the continuation effect for notifying that the bonus state will continue is executed in the middle of the bonus state. Also when shifting, the same continuation effect as described above is executed.

That is, the sub control device 20 as a special effect control means, when the second special game state (AT state) is generated by the second special game state control means (main control device 10), the first special game state ( It is possible to execute a continuation effect capable of notifying that the bonus state) will continue.
Therefore, even when the game state is changed from the bonus state to the AT state, it is possible to execute the performance during that time without any sense of incongruity, and the game is executed after making the player recognize that the bonus state has continued. It becomes possible to let

Further, when the AT state is shifted to immediately after the bonus state ends, the same effect as that executed during the bonus state is executed during the AT state.
That is, when the second special game state (AT state) is generated by the second special game state control means (main control device 10), the sub control device 20 as the special effect control means is in the second special game state. , it is possible to continuously execute the first special effect (the effect corresponding to the bonus state).
Therefore, even after the transition from the bonus state to the AT state, the player runs the game while recognizing that the bonus state continues, thereby improving the amusement of the game through the execution of a novel and unprecedented game. It becomes possible.

By displaying the bonus state image 60a on the main display 8, an effect corresponding to the bonus state as the first special effect is executed. Any effect image displayed during the first special effect may be used as long as it enhances interest during the bonus state, and the first special effect may be executed by displaying a still image, You may perform a 1st special production|presentation by displaying a moving image.
Also, although the first special effect is executed by the main display 8, it may be executed by both the main display 8 and the sub-display 17, or by the sub-display 17 alone. good too.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the effect in the AT state in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment will be described.

As described above, when the AT state is entered immediately after the bonus state, the effect (first special effect) corresponding to the bonus state is continuously executed on the main display 8. When the AT state continues for a relatively long period of time due to an additional lottery or the like, not a few players notice that the bonus state has already ended and the state has shifted to the AT state.
Therefore, in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, when the AT state that occurs immediately after the bonus state continues for a relatively long period of time, the effect corresponding to the bonus state being executed on the main display 8 (the 1 special performance) is changed to a performance (second special performance) corresponding to the AT state.

FIG. 47 shows an effect image on the main display 8 during the AT state, and shows an effect image when the duration of the AT state exceeds a predetermined period.
First, as shown in FIG. 47(a), when the AT state immediately after the bonus state is within a predetermined period, the fact that the bonus state is in progress is notified on the main screen of the main display 8 in the same manner as described above. A bonus state image 60a is displayed, and an effect (first special effect) corresponding to the bonus state is executed.

Further, when the number of medals paid out during the AT state is 50, for example, 50, 100, 150, etc., the continuous effect image 61a is displayed below the bonus state image 60a in the same manner as described above. It is displayed, and a continuation effect for informing whether or not the bonus state (actually AT state) will continue is executed.

In addition, the continuous management of the AT state is performed based on the number of medals paid out in the same way as the bonus state, so even during the AT state, each branch point where the AT state may end and continuous effects are executed. The point in time at which the
That is, when the continuation of the AT state is managed by the number of medals acquired by the player (the number of net increases), the ending of the AT state is not a periodic continuous effect that is continuously executed from the bonus state. This is because there is a high possibility that the timing will come off, and the player may recognize in advance that the AT state will end when the continuous effect is executed.

Then, if the AT state has not ended yet and continues until the next game, as shown in FIG. It is notified that the state (actually AT state) continues.
Also, the bonus state image 60a is displayed in the main portion of the main display 8 screen.

However, when the continuous effect is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, the third time at the time of 150 sheets), the player can recognize that it is in the AT state instead of the bonus state image 60a as shown in the figure. AT state image 60b is displayed.
That is, when the AT state continues for a relatively long period of time, the AT state image 60b is displayed without displaying the bonus state image 60a, thereby producing an effect ( The first special effect) is changed to the effect corresponding to the AT state (second special effect).

In addition, on the upper left of the screen of the main display 8, a remaining medal number image 62a ("100" in the figure) indicating the number of remaining medals in the AT state appears and displayed, and on the right of the screen of the main display 8, A number-of-executed-games image 62b ("100G" in the drawing) showing the total number of executed games in the bonus state and AT state appears.
Therefore, when the AT state continues for a relatively long period of time, it is clearly notified that the time point is the AT state, and the number of remaining medals in the special game state (bonus state and AT state) at that time point Thus, the number of games that have been played is accurately notified.
In subsequent games, the AT state image 60b is continuously displayed, and the remaining medal number image 62a and the executed game number image 62b are updated and displayed based on the progress of the game and the lottery result of the role. Become.

On the other hand, when the AT state ends, as shown in FIG. 47(c), a bonus end image 61c consisting of text information of "bonus end" at the end of the game and a A bonus game number image 61d ("100 G" in the illustration) indicating the number of games that have been played, and a payout medal number image 61e ("250" in the illustration) indicating the number of medals paid out during the bonus state and the AT state. , is displayed at the center of the screen of the main display 8 to notify the result of the game during the current special game state.
The number of games in which the AT state other than the bonus state continued, or the number of medals paid out during the AT state may be displayed.
Also, the number of medals actually obtained by the player (net increase number) may be displayed.

As described above, during the AT state immediately after the bonus state, the number of medals paid out and the number of games played during the bonus state are not displayed as in the bonus state. Whether or not the bonus state (actually, the AT state) will continue is notified at predetermined intervals to the player who cannot fully comprehend how far the state has progressed, by executing the above-described continuous effect. It will be.
In addition, it is possible to prevent the special game state from suddenly ending due to the execution of the continuation effect, which would result in a lower interest in the special game state.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, as described above, an additional lottery for the number of remaining medals in the AT state is performed in the game during the AT state. It is necessary to execute an additional effect for notifying the number of medals to be displayed.
On the other hand, in the bonus state, since the end condition cannot be changed, no additional lottery is performed for the number of remaining medals in the bonus state.

Therefore, in the game in the AT state in which the first special effect is performed, if the additional lottery is performed, the additional effect is not performed, and if the number of medals is added by winning the additional lottery , the number of additional medals is not reported and is only added to the number of remaining medals in the AT state.
When the bonus end image 61c is displayed in this state, it means that the games for the number of the unannounced additional medals remain. Along with the execution of the effect added to the number (so-called added effect), the special game state continues again.
In this case, since the player notices that the game has shifted to the AT state due to the addition of the number of medals, it is preferable to execute an effect (second special effect) corresponding to the AT state in subsequent games.

On the other hand, in the game after the second special effect is started in the AT state, if an additional lottery is performed, for example, an additional effect corresponding to the additional lottery is performed on the main display 8, and the additional lottery is performed. When the number of medals is added by winning , the number of added medals is added and displayed on the remaining number of medals image 62a.
In addition, in the game in which the first special effect is being performed in the AT state, if the additional lottery is won and the game is changed to the second special effect in the subsequent game, the number of remaining medals image 62a is displayed. appears, the remaining medal number image 62a corresponding to the added medal number is displayed.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, in the case of shifting to the AT state immediately after the bonus state, when the continuous effect executed in the AT state reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, three times), That is, when the number of medals paid out in the AT state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 150), the effect corresponding to the bonus state is changed to the effect corresponding to the AT state.

That is, when the second special game state (AT state) is generated by the second special game state control means (main control device 10), the sub control device 20 as the special effect control means is in the second special game state. When the duration of exceeds a predetermined period (when the continuous performance is executed three times), the first special performance (performance corresponding to the bonus state) is switched to the second special performance (performance corresponding to the AT state). It makes it possible.
Therefore, when the AT state continues for a long period of time, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the game state at that time is the AT state, and the player already recognizes that the AT state. It is possible to prevent distrust from being given to.

Further, in the game after the first special effect is changed to the second special effect, if an additional lottery is performed, the additional effect corresponding to the additional lottery is executed on the main display 8, for example. be.
That is, the sub-control device 20 as a special effect control means, the second special game state (AT state) continuation period exceeds the predetermined period, the game after switching from the first special effect to the second special effect In the above, when a specific lottery capable of awarding a predetermined privilege (additional number of medals) to a player is performed, an effect (additional effect) corresponding to the specific lottery can be executed.

Therefore, when the AT state continues for a long period of time, the fact that the AT state is in effect is notified, so that the additional effect, which is not executed in the bonus state, can be executed without any problem, and the game is interesting. Therefore, it is possible to improve the quality and expectations of the player.

The conditions for changing from the first special effect to the second special effect may be other than those described above. For example, the number of games executed after shifting to the AT state may be a predetermined number (for example, 100 times). .
Further, when the number of remaining medals becomes a predetermined number (for example, 300) or more by an additional lottery during the AT state, the first special effect may be changed to the second special effect. That is, in this case, since it is determined in advance that the AT state continues for a long period of time, even if the AT state does not continue for a long period of time, the effect is changed to the second special effect.

Further, the continuation of the AT state may be managed by the number of medals acquired by the player (the number of net increase). It is preferable to execute the continuous effect when the number of medals obtained (the number of net increase) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50, 100, etc.).
As described above, the control in the case where the AT state transition lottery is won during the bonus state in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment is performed.

[Control when a bonus combination is won during the AT state in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50, control in the gaming machine (slot machine 1) of the fifth embodiment when a bonus combination is won during the AT state will be described.

First, with reference to FIG. 48, in the gaming machine (slot machine 1) of the fifth embodiment, in a game during the AT state in which an effect (first special effect) corresponding to the bonus state is executed, a bonus combination is executed. Control when winning is explained.

The timing chart of FIG. 48 shows the transition of the game state according to the progress of the game when the bonus combination is won in the AT state game in which the first special effect is being executed, and the display contents on the main display 8. It shows the transition of (performance).
As shown in FIG. 48, in a game in which the game state is the normal game state, when the special symbol combination stops (timing t56), the game state is changed from the normal game state to the bonus state. The performance is changed from the performance during the normal game state to the performance during the bonus state (first special performance).
Further, when the player wins the push order bell combination in each game due to the transition to the bonus state, the push order navigation is executed on the main display 8 .

Then, in a game or the like during the bonus state, when the AT state shift lottery is won, the game state is shifted from the bonus state to the AT state from the game next to the last game in the bonus state (timing t57).
Further, even if the gaming state is changed from the bonus state to the AT state by the control of the sub-controller 20 based on the reception of the control information from the main controller 10, the main display 8 will display the effect corresponding to the bonus state. will continue to be executed.
Further, even if the state is shifted to the AT state, the push order navigation is executed on the main display 8 when the push order bell combination is won in each game, as in the bonus state.
Therefore, even when the game state is shifted from the bonus state to the AT state, the player proceeds with the game without noticing it.

Further, when the gaming state is shifted to the AT state, a lottery for a bonus combination is also performed in the game during the AT state.
Then, when the bonus combination is won in the game in the AT state, the state of winning the bonus combination (bonus winning state) is maintained until the special symbol combination (special symbol mode) is stopped.

In the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, as described above, in the game during the bonus win state in the AT state, when the bonus combination and the other combination are won, the bonus A priority stop control is performed to preferentially stop a role other than a role.
In addition, under the control of the sub-controller 20 based on the reception of the control information from the main controller 10, in the game during the bonus winning state in the AT state, the winning of the bonus hand is not notified and the bonus hand is not notified. The effect (first special effect) during the state (actually AT state) and the push order navigation are continuously executed.

Therefore, even if the player wins the bonus role in the game in the AT state, the player will continue to play the game in the AT state without noticing that the bonus role has been won. Since the possibility of shifting to the bonus state (the special symbol combination is stopped) is extremely low, the right to shift to the bonus state is held until the AT state ends.

Then, when the game that ends the AT state ends and the game state shifts to the normal game state (timing t59), the sub control device 20 based on the reception of the control information from the main control device 10 By the control, it is reported that the bonus combination is won, and an instruction performance for stopping the special symbol combination is executed on the main display 8 together with the performance corresponding to the normal game state.

The instruction effect for stopping the special symbol combination is continuously executed until the special symbol combination is stopped, and when the special symbol combination is stopped, the game state shifts to the bonus state from the game. Also, the effect on the main display 8 or the like is changed from the effect corresponding to the normal game state to the effect corresponding to the bonus state.
Also, the push order navigation that has not been executed due to the termination of the AT state is resumed by the transition to the bonus state.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, the effect corresponding to the bonus state is executed during the AT state immediately after the bonus state. Thus, it is possible to form a game mode in which the game state continues.

In addition, in the game during the AT state in which the first special effect is executed, when the bonus combination is won, various controls are performed so as not to stop the special symbol combination, so the AT state ends. The possibility of shifting to the bonus state (the special symbol combination is stopped) is extremely low, and as a result, the right to shift to the bonus state is held until the AT state ends.

That is, the main control device 10 as a special game state control means terminates the second special game state when the first special condition is satisfied (winning the bonus combination) in the second special game state (AT state). The right to generate the first special game state (the right to transition to the bonus state) can be held until the game is played.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent the execution of a game that causes a sense of incongruity, such as the occurrence of the bonus state again during the bonus state (actually the AT state).

Further, when the right to shift to the bonus state has been granted at the time when the AT state ends, an instruction performance for stopping the special symbol combination is executed on the main display 8, immediately after the AT state ends. It is possible to shift to the bonus state immediately.

That is, the sub-control device 20 as a special effect control means, when the second special game state (AT state) is completed and the right to generate the first special game state (the right to move to the bonus state) is held , a post-end instruction effect control means capable of executing an instruction effect for instructing derivation of a special symbol mode (special symbol combination).
Therefore, it is possible to simulate a game mode in which the bonus state is generated again immediately after the AT state produced as the bonus state ends, in which a so-called continuous bonus state (or one consecutive game) is generated. , it is possible to greatly improve the player's sense of expectation.

In addition, after the transition to the bonus state again, as described above, the game control and effect control during the bonus state including the AT state transition lottery are performed, and the control related to the bonus state and AT state is repeatedly executed. It will be done.
In addition, when a bonus combination is won in the AT state, a lottery for shifting to the AT state is also performed in the same manner as described above.

Note that during or after the final game in the AT state in which the first special effect is being executed, an effect as to whether or not the right to shift to the bonus state is granted is executed on the main display 8, and the transition to the bonus state is performed. When the right is granted, as a result of the effect, it is notified that the right to transition to the bonus state is granted, and if the right to transition to the bonus state is not granted, as a result of the effect, It may be arranged to notify that the bonus status transition right has not been granted.
Further, the above effect may be executed as a continuous effect during a predetermined number of games being executed just before the end of the AT state.

Next, referring to FIGS. 49 and 50, in the gaming machine (slot machine 1) of the fifth embodiment, a game during the AT state in which an effect (second special effect) corresponding to the AT state is executed. , the control when the bonus combination and the special replay combination are won will be described.

First, with reference to FIG. 49, the case where the bonus combination is won during the AT state in which the second special effect is being performed will be described.

As described above, when the duration of the AT state exceeds a predetermined period (for example, when the number of paid-out medals exceeds 150), for example, the main display 8 will not be executed until then. The effect (first special effect) corresponding to the bonus state that was being played is changed to the effect (second special effect) corresponding to the AT state and executed.
In the game during the normal game state, an AT state transition lottery is also performed, so even if the transition lottery is won and the normal game state is directly shifted to the AT state, the second special effect is the AT state. will be executed from the beginning of the

In the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, as described above, when a bonus combination is won during the AT state in which the first special effect is being performed, the AT state terminates the bonus state transition right. However, when the bonus combination is won during the AT state in which the second special effect is being performed, the bonus state can be shifted from that point.

Therefore, when the bonus combination is won during the AT state in which the second special effect is being performed, the instruction effect for stopping the special symbol combination from the game is executed by the main display 8 or the like, and the AT is executed. It is possible to shift to the bonus state in the middle of the AT state without waiting for the end of the state.

FIG. 49 shows an effect image on the main display 8 when the bonus combination is won during the AT state in which the second special effect is being performed.
Various effects images on the main display 8 are displayed by the sub-controller 20 based on the reception of control information from the main controller 10 .

First, as shown in FIG. 49(a), when the duration of the AT state immediately after the bonus state exceeds a predetermined period, or when the normal game state directly transitions to the AT state, the main display 8 An AT state image 60b is displayed in the main part of the screen to notify that the player is in the AT state, and an effect (second special effect) corresponding to the AT state is executed.
In addition, on the upper left of the screen of the main display 8, a remaining medal number image 62a ("100" in the figure) indicating the number of remaining medals in the AT state appears and displayed, and on the right of the screen of the main display 8, A number-of-executed-games image 62b ("100G" in the drawing) showing the total number of executed games in the bonus state and AT state appears.

Then, as shown in FIG. 49(b), when the bonus combination is won in the game in the AT state in which the second special effect is executed, the sub-control based on the reception of the control information from the main controller 10 Under the control of the device 20, the screen of the main display 8 is displayed below the AT state image 60b as special operation information, prompting the user to stop the special symbol combination ("7.7.7", which is the special symbol mode). A symbol instruction image 52a consisting of character information "Aim for 7" and an operation instruction image 52b indicating reverse pressing ("5c→5b→5a") of the stop operation order (stop direction) of the reel 4 are shown in the horizontal direction. , and an instruction performance for stopping the special symbol combination is executed.
In the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, the bonus combination is won alone. , the instruction effect is executed.

Note that the main controller 10 manages the duration of the AT state and the like, thereby determining whether the effect during the AT state on the main display 8 or the like is the first special effect or the second special effect. In the state where the second special performance is being performed, the sub-control device provides control information for executing the instruction performance for stopping the special symbol combination at the time when the bonus combination is won. I am trying to send it to 20.
Also, if the stop operation is proper, the special symbol combination is stopped in any stop operation order. ("5c→5b→5a") is reported (instructed). This is so that it cannot be distinguished from the winning of a special replay combination, which will be described later.

Then, as shown in FIG. 49(c), when the player performs the stop operation of the reels 4 according to the instruction effect, a special pattern 54a with 7 symbols 54a lined up on the effective line (middle line) of each reel 4 is displayed. The symbol combination will stop.

Further, when the special symbol combination is stopped on the reel 4, the lower part of the screen of the main display 8 informs that medals have been added (added) to the number of remaining medals in the AT state and the number of such medals. Then, an add-on result image 62 including numerical information of "+150" is displayed, and an add-on effect (privilege giving effect) is executed.
At this time, the number of medals notified by the added result image 62 is the number of medals that defines the continuation period of the bonus state.

By stopping the special symbol combination, the game state is changed from the AT state to the bonus state in subsequent games.
That is, the game state is changed to the bonus state in the middle of the AT state.
It should be noted that there are cases where the special symbol combination cannot be stopped even if the command effect is performed, but in this case the command effect is continuously executed in subsequent games as well. However, various information related to the execution of the game during this period is irrelevant to the continuous management of the AT state.

In the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, when the game state is changed to the bonus state in the middle of the AT state in which the effect (second special effect) corresponding to the AT state is being executed, the main display The second special effect in 8 is continuously executed.
Therefore, although not shown, the AT state image 60b, the number of remaining medals image 62a, and the number of played games image 62b are continuously displayed on the main display 8 even after the game is changed to the bonus state. , the game in the bonus state is executed, and the remaining medal number image 62a and the executed game number image 62b are updated and displayed according to the progress of the game and the lottery result of the role.

The number of remaining medals image 62a is displayed by adding the number of medals displayed in the additional result image 62 at the start of the bonus state.
However, since the continuous management of the bonus state and the AT state is executed separately, the number of remaining medals displayed in the number of remaining medals image 62a is a pseudo AT state obtained by adding the number of remaining medals in each of the bonus state and the AT state. It indicates the period during which the state can be continued.

That is, when the game state is changed to the bonus state in the middle of the AT state in which the second special effect is being executed, the second special effect is continuously executed even during the bonus state. Due to the stop of the special symbol combination in the game, a predetermined number of medals (150 that define the duration of the bonus state) are added to the remaining number of AT state medals, as if the AT state continuation period is extended. The production is executed as if it were done.

Then, when the bonus state ends, the game state is changed from the bonus state to the AT state, and the AT state at the time when the game ended in the middle is restored by shifting to the bonus state.
Further, even when the AT state is restored, the AT state image 60b, the remaining medal number image 62a, and the executed game number image 62b are continuously displayed on the main display 8, and the game in the AT state is executed again. The remaining medal number image 62a and the executed game number image 62b are updated and displayed according to the progress of the game and the lottery result of the winning combination.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, when the bonus combination is won in the game in the AT state in which the second special effect is being executed, the special An instruction effect for stopping the combination of symbols is executed.
That is, the sub-control device 20 as a special effect control means, in the second special game state, when the first special condition is established (winning the bonus combination) in the second special game state (AT state), There is provided an intermediate instruction effect control means capable of executing an instruction effect for instructing derivation of a special symbol mode (special symbol combination).

Further, when the special symbol combination is stopped on the reel 4 by the execution of the instruction effect, a bonus state is generated. The added production to notify is executed.
That is, the sub-control device 20 as a special effect control means, based on the fact that the special symbol mode is derived during the second special game state, a benefit related to the extension of the duration of the second special game state is given. There is provided a privilege giving effect control means capable of executing a privilege giving effect (additional effect) capable of informing that.

Therefore, when the bonus combination is won in the game during the AT state in which the second special effect is being executed, the effect is executed as if the AT state continuable period was extended. It is possible to improve expectations.
Further, when a bonus role is won in a game in the AT state, the effect related to the bonus state is changed according to the effect state at that time (first special effect or second special effect), thereby allowing the game to be played. Since the progress mode of the state is changed, the game can be diversified and the interest of the game can be improved.

It should be noted that there is a possibility that the state may shift to the bonus state a plurality of times during one AT state, but even in this case, the instruction effect and the additional effect similar to those described above are executed when each bonus combination is won.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the case where the special replay combination is won during the AT state in which the effect (second special effect) corresponding to the AT state is being performed will be described.

In the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, when a rare combination is won in a game in the AT state, an extra lottery is performed to add a predetermined number of medals to the number of remaining medals in the AT state.
Since the rare combination includes a special replay combination, an additional lottery will be conducted even if the special replay combination is won.

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, "replay replay replay", "replay bell bell" and "bell replay bell" are set as symbol combinations corresponding to the replay combination. It is
And when you win a normal replay role (a replay role other than a rare role), "Replay Replay Replay" can be stopped on the active line, and when you win a chance replay role (rare role), "Replay Bell Bell" is effective. The reel 4 can be stopped on the line, and when the special replay role (rare role) is won, the reel 4 is stopped so that ``replay, replay, replay'' or ``bell, replay, bell'' can be stopped on the effective line. .

Further, in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, in a game in which a special replay combination is won, when the right reel 4c is stopped first (the reel 4 is stopped by a special operation such as so-called reverse push or irregular push). ), the symbol combination of "bell replay bell" is stopped on the active line, and if the other reel 4 is stopped first, it is the same as when winning a normal replay combination. The stop control of the reels 4 is performed so that the symbol combination of "replay, replay, replay" is stopped on the activated line.

Then, in the game when the special replay role is won, if the additional lottery is won, the main display 8 is instructed to perform a reverse push, and if the additional lottery is not won, the main display 8 , the reverse-pressing instruction effect is not executed.

FIG. 50 shows an effect image on the main display 8 when the special replay combination is won during the AT state in which the second special effect is being performed.
Various effects images on the main display 8 are displayed by the sub-controller 20 based on the reception of control information from the main controller 10 .

First, as shown in FIG. 50(a), when the duration of the AT state immediately after the bonus state exceeds a predetermined period, or when the normal game state directly transitions to the AT state, the main display 8 An AT state image 60b is displayed in the main part of the screen to notify that the player is in the AT state, and an effect (second special effect) corresponding to the AT state is executed.
In addition, on the upper left of the screen of the main display 8, a remaining medal number image 62a ("100" in the figure) indicating the number of remaining medals in the AT state appears and displayed, and on the right of the screen of the main display 8, A number-of-executed-games image 62b ("100G" in the drawing) showing the total number of executed games in the bonus state and AT state appears.

Then, as shown in FIG. 50(b), in the game in which the second special effect is being executed (while the reels 4 are rotating), when the special replay combination is won and the additional lottery is won, the main control unit 10, a special symbol combination (a special symbol mode " 7, 7, 7”), and the stop operation order (stop direction) of the reel 4 is reversed (“5c→5b→5a”). Operation instruction images 52b indicating that the special symbol combination is to be stopped are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, and an instruction effect for stopping the special symbol combination is executed.

That is, in the game in which the AT state image 60b is displayed, when the special replay combination is won and the additional lottery is won, the same instruction effect as when the above-described bonus combination is won (see FIG. 49(b)) is executed. It is done.

Then, as shown in FIG. 50(c), when the player performs the stop operation of the reels 4 according to the instruction performance, a bell symbol 54c is displayed on the middle stage of the left reel 4a, a replay symbol 54b is displayed on the middle stage of the middle reel 4b, and a replay symbol 54b is displayed on the middle stage of the middle reel 4b. The bell symbols 54c are stopped in the middle row of the right reel 4c, and the symbol combination of "bell replay bell" is formed on the effective line (middle row line) of the reel 4 to win a special replay combination. Become.

In the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, the bell symbol 54c is arranged above the seven symbols 54a on the left reel 4a, and the replay symbol 54b is arranged above the seven symbols 54a on the middle reel 4b. The arrangement of the symbols on each reel 4 is set so that the bell symbol 54c is arranged above the seven symbols 54a on the right reel 4c.
Therefore, when the symbol combination of "Bell Replay Bell" is stopped on the effective line (on the middle line) by the stop operation as instructed, the lower line (lower line of each reel 4) other than the effective line The symbol combination of "7, 7, 7" will stop at the line connecting the symbols.

That is, when the player performs a stop operation on the reels 4 according to the instruction effect for stopping the special symbol combination, the special symbol combination does not stop on the activated line, but the "Bell Replay" on the activated line does not stop. Along with the stoppage of the "Bell" symbol combination, the special symbol combination is stopped on the lower line.
In addition, although the reel 4 is stopped by reverse pressing, if the eye pressing operation is inappropriate (inaccurate), symbols other than the 7 symbols 54a are stopped on the lower stage of the predetermined reel 4, and , the symbol combination of "bell replay bell" will stop on the active line.

Then, when the symbol combination of "Bell, Replay, Bell" stops on the reel 4, medals are added to the number of remaining medals in the AT state on the lower part of the screen of the main display 8. And the addition result image 62 including numerical information of "+50", which reports the number of medals, is displayed, and the addition effect (privilege giving effect) is executed.
Note that the numerical information displayed in the added result image 62 is changed according to the number of added medals.

Therefore, an additional effect is executed as if the number of medals was increased by stopping the special symbol combination.
Also, although not shown, at the start of the next game, the additional remaining medal number image 62a is updated and displayed, and the game is executed in the AT state.

As described above, in the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, when a special replay combination is won during the AT state in which an effect corresponding to the AT state is being performed, and the additional lottery at that time is won, In spite of the fact that the bonus combination is not won, the same instruction effect as when the bonus combination is won (at the time of transition to the bonus state) is executed, and the stop button 5 is operated to stop the reels 4 according to the instruction effect. When done, the symbol combination corresponding to the special replay combination on the active line stops, and the special symbol combination stops on the lower line.
Then, in accordance with the stoppage of the symbol combination corresponding to the special replay combination, an additional effect is performed on the main display device 8 .

That is, the sub-control device 20 as the privilege provision effect control means, when the special symbol mode (special symbol combination) is derived outside the effective area of the variable display means (reel 4), the first special condition (bonus combination Winning) is not established, it is possible to execute the privilege giving performance (additional performance).

Therefore, it is possible to execute an additional performance as if the number of medals was added by stopping the special combination of symbols, so that it is possible to clearly notify that the player has won the additional lottery, and the satisfaction of the player is further improved. It becomes possible to let

In addition, by making the additional effects common when the special replay role is won and when the bonus state transitions, even when the bonus state transitions, the remaining number of medals in the AT state is the same as when the special replay role is won. It is possible to make the player recognize that the number of medals has been added.
In other words, the additional effect at the time of transition to the bonus state does not actually add the number of remaining medals in the AT state. Although it is made to appear as if it is added to the number of medals, it is possible to make the player recognize that the number of remaining medals in the AT state is actually added even when the bonus state is changed.

When the special replay combination is won, if the reel 4 is stopped by pushing backwards, the combination of symbols that will stop on the active line can be any combination other than the above as long as the special combination of symbols stops on the lower line. good.
Also, when the symbol combination of "Bell Replay Bell" is stopped, the special symbol combination is stopped on the lower line, but if it is not the effective line, the special symbol combination is stopped on any line. You can let it run.
As described above, control is performed when a bonus combination is won during the AT state in the gaming machine of the fifth embodiment.

Although the slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment has been described above, the bonus state and the AT state may be of the number-of-games management type as long as the management types are the same.
Also, after changing to the effect (second special effect) corresponding to the AT state, the effect (first special effect) corresponding to the bonus state may be executed in a part of the case where the bonus state is won. .
In addition, an effect (first special effect) corresponding to the bonus state may be executed in part when the bonus state is won during the AT state directly shifted from the normal game state.

Also, at the end of a series of special game states (bonus state or AT state), the number of wins in the bonus state during that period may be displayed as a result display. A value guessing factor can be provided to the player.
In addition, in the case of a bonus state where the right to shift to AT state is granted when the bonus role is won, such as when the bonus state transitions due to double winning with a special role with extremely low winning probability (for example, middle stage cherry role) Alternatively, an effect corresponding to the AT state may be executed immediately after the bonus state ends.
The slot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment is configured as described above.

As described above, in the present invention, a game with variable display of the variable display means (reels 4) is executed based on the player's operation, and a special game state advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the special condition. In a gaming machine (slot machine 1) capable of generating (bonus state, AT state), a first special game state (bonus state) is set as the special game state based on establishment of a first special condition (winning of a bonus combination). Special game state control means (main control means) capable of generating a second special game state (AT state) as the special game state based on the establishment of the second special condition (winning of the AT state transition lottery) A device 10) executes a first special performance (a performance corresponding to a bonus state) that allows a player to recognize that the first special game state has occurred, based on the occurrence of the first special game state. , Based on the occurrence of the second special game state, it is possible to execute a second special effect (a performance corresponding to the AT state) that allows the player to recognize that the second special game state has occurred. Special effect control means (sub control device 20), and the special game state control means, when the second special condition is established in relation to the occurrence of the first special game state, the first A second special game state control means (main control device 10) capable of generating the second special game state after the end of the special game state is provided, and the special effect control means is the second special game state control means. When the second special game state is generated by the second special game state, the first special effect can be continuously executed in the second special game state.

Therefore, even if the game state is changed from the first special game state to the second special game state, the game contents such that the first special game state is extended without making the player aware of it. It can be realized, and it becomes possible to improve interest by providing novel game contents that have never existed before.
The special game state control means, the special effect control means, and the second special game state control means may be provided in the main control device 10 or may be provided in the sub control device 20. Alternatively, the main controller 10 and the sub-controller 20 may cooperate with each other.

Further, the special effect control means, when the second special game state is generated by the second special game state control means, executes a continuous effect capable of notifying that the first special game state continues. It has a configuration that makes it possible.

Therefore, when the game state is changed from the first special game state to the second special game state, it is possible to execute the performance during that time without any discomfort, and the first special game state continues for the player. It is possible to execute the game after recognizing that.

Further, the special effect control means, when the second special game state is generated by the second special game state control means, when the duration of the second special game state exceeds a predetermined period, the It is configured to be able to switch from the first special performance to the second special performance.

Therefore, when the second special game state continues for a long period of time, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the game state at that time is the second special game state, and the length of the second special game state can be increased. It is possible to prevent distrust from being given to the player who recognizes that the continuation of the period has already changed to the second special game state.
Also, by switching to the second special effect, it becomes possible to execute the effect during the second special game state without any problem in subsequent games.

Further, the special game state control means enables the first special game state to occur when the special symbol mode is derived by the variable display means, and the first special game state is generated during the second special game state. When the special condition is established, the right to generate the first special game state can be held until the second special game state ends, and the special effect control means controls the state when the second special game state ends. A post-end instruction performance control means (sub-control device 20) capable of executing an instruction performance instructing derivation of the special symbol mode when the right to generate the first special game state is held. It is configured.

Therefore, immediately after the end of the second special game state in which the first special effect is executed, the first special game state occurs again, i.e., a so-called consecutive chance (or one game consecutive) occurs in a pseudo manner. It becomes possible to form the shape, and it becomes possible to greatly improve the player's sense of expectation.
The post-end instruction effect control means may be provided in the main control device 10 or may be provided in the sub control device 20 . Alternatively, the main controller 10 and the sub-controller 20 may cooperate with each other.

Further, the special game state control means makes it possible to generate the first special game state when a special symbol mode (special symbol combination) is derived in the variable display means, and the special effect control means. is an intermediate instruction capable of executing an instruction performance instructing derivation of the special symbol mode during the second special game state when the first special condition is established during the second special game state. Effect control means (sub-control device 20) and, based on the fact that the special symbol mode is derived during the second special game state, a privilege relating to the extension of the duration of the second special game state is given. and a privilege giving effect control means (sub control device 20) capable of executing a privilege giving effect (additional effect) capable of informing of.

Therefore, in the game during the second special game state in which the second special effect is being executed, when the first special condition is met, an effect as if the continuation possible period of the second special game state was extended. It will be executed, and it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation.
The midway instruction effect control means and the privilege provision effect control means may be provided in the main control device 10 or may be provided in the sub control device 20 . Alternatively, the main controller 10 and the sub-controller 20 may cooperate with each other.

Further, when the special symbol mode is derived outside the effective area of the variable display means, the privilege granting effect control means controls the privilege granting effect even if the first special condition is not satisfied. is configured to be able to execute

Therefore, it is possible to execute a privilege giving performance as if a privilege was given by deriving the special symbol mode, and it is possible to clearly notify that the privilege is given, and further improve the satisfaction of the player. becomes possible.

On the other hand, in Patent Document 1, when an AT state or the like occurs, the reel stop order for establishing a winning combination is notified by lighting an LED or the like, and the player stops the reels in the notified stop order. Disclosed is a gaming machine that stops the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination when the combination is made.
However, conventional gaming machines have not been sufficient to improve the interest in games and to improve the player's sense of expectation.
As described above, according to the slot machine 1 of the present invention, it is possible to solve all or part of such problems that conventional gaming machines should improve.

Although the preferred embodiments of the gaming machine of the present invention have been described above, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the present invention. Needless to say.
For example, in the present embodiment, the AT state (AT) is given as a privilege, but ART or RT may be given.

In addition, in this embodiment, the AT state type is a type that can be continued multiple times in the AT state, which is executed in units of a predetermined number of games. It may be of a type such as

In addition, in this embodiment, the effect button 2d and the upper effect button 2f are exemplified as the effect operation means, but other means such as the bet button 2a and stop may be used as long as they output an input signal by the player's operation. Button 5, start lever 3, etc. may be used.

In addition, the front door 1a is provided with a vibrating means for vibrating the front door 1a by operating a motor, a speaker, etc., and at the time of various performances such as a sign performance, a battle performance, etc., and at a predetermined time in the special zone for adding, By activating the vibrating means, the player's sense of anticipation may be heightened.
In addition, the front door 1a is provided with a blower means for blowing air toward the players, and the blower means is operated during various performances such as an omen performance, a battle performance, etc., or at a predetermined time in the special zone. Therefore, the expectation of the player may be heightened.

As display means, a main display 8 and a sub-display 17 are provided, but any one of the display means can be used to display various effects such as an omen effect, a battle effect, etc., and various effects in the additional special zone. It may be executed, or it may be executed by both of the two display means.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main controller 10 operates as various means such as the lottery means, but the sub-controller 20 performs some or all of them, and the sub-controller 20 operates as the various means. can also
Conversely, the main controller 10 can perform some or all of the operations performed by the sub controller 20, and the main controller 10 can operate as various means.

Also, although the present invention is applied to slot machines, it can also be applied to other game machines such as pachinko (for example, ball slots).
In addition, the present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine that can execute a game using pseudo game media in a data format without using actual game media such as medals and game balls.

1: slot machine 2: bet button 2d: effect button 4: reel 5: stop button 8: main display 10: main controller 17: sub-display 20: sub-controller

Claims (6)

A gaming machine capable of executing a game accompanied by variable display on variable display means based on player's operation and generating a special game state advantageous to the player based on establishment of a special condition,
A special capable of generating a first special game state as the special game state based on the establishment of the first special condition, and generating a second special game state as the special game state based on the establishment of the second special condition. game state control means;
Based on the occurrence of the first special game state, a first special effect is executed that allows the player to recognize that the first special game state has occurred, and based on the occurrence of the second special game state, the above. a special effect control means capable of executing a second special effect that allows the player to recognize that the second special game state is occurring;
with
The special game state control means generates the second special game state after the end of the first special game state when the second special condition is established in relation to the occurrence of the first special game state. Equipped with a second special game state control means capable of
The special effect control means, when the second special game state is generated by the second special game state control means, continues to execute the first special effect in the second special game state. A gaming machine characterized by enabling The special effect control means, when the second special game state is generated by the second special game state control means, executes a continuous effect capable of notifying that the first special game state continues. 2. The game machine according to claim 1, characterized in that it enables. The special effect control means, when the second special game state is generated by the second special game state control means, when the duration of the second special game state exceeds a predetermined period, the first 3. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein it is possible to switch from a special effect to the second special effect. The special game state control means is
making it possible to generate the first special game state when a special symbol mode is derived in the variable display means;
When the first special condition is satisfied during the second special game state, the right to generate the first special game state can be held until the second special game state ends,
The special effect control means, when the right to generate the first special game state is held when the second special game state ends, executes an instruction effect for instructing derivation of the special symbol mode. 4. The game machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, further comprising post-end instruction effect control means capable of The special game state control means makes it possible to generate the first special game state when the special symbol mode is derived in the variable display means,
The special effect control means is
When the first special condition is established during the second special game state, during the second special game state, midway instruction performance control capable of executing an instruction performance instructing derivation of the special symbol mode. means and
Based on the derivation of the special symbol mode during the second special game state, a privilege giving performance capable of informing that a privilege relating to the extension of the duration of the second special game state is given is executed. a privilege grant effect control means capable of
The game machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, characterized by comprising: The privilege giving effect control means executes the privilege giving effect even if the first special condition is not satisfied when the special symbol mode is drawn outside the effective area of the variable display means. 6. The game machine according to claim 5, characterized in that it is made possible to allow the game to be played.

Images